WO2025066920A1 - Communication method and communication apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and communication apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025066920A1 WO2025066920A1 PCT/CN2024/118539 CN2024118539W WO2025066920A1 WO 2025066920 A1 WO2025066920 A1 WO 2025066920A1 CN 2024118539 W CN2024118539 W CN 2024118539W WO 2025066920 A1 WO2025066920 A1 WO 2025066920A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- distance
- channel model
- basis
- spatial
- terminal device
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
- H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L25/00—Baseband systems
- H04L25/02—Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a communication method and a communication device.
- MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
- network equipment can use precoding technology to reduce interference between multiple terminal devices and interference between multiple signal streams of the same terminal device, thereby improving signal quality, achieving space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
- the terminal device can determine the precoding matrix that is compatible with the downlink channel through channel measurement and other methods, and feedback the relevant information of the precoding matrix to the network device through the precoding matrix indicator (PMI).
- the network device can determine a precoding matrix that is the same or similar to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device from the codebook based on the PMI.
- the area of antenna arrays of network devices has further increased.
- the Rayleigh distance will increase exponentially with the area of the antenna array.
- the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of spherical wavefronts, the signal phases at different antenna vibrator positions are distorted, which increases the mismatch risk of traditional codebooks. For example, the spatial position corresponding to the codebook index provided by the PMI does not match the actual position of the terminal device, resulting in a decrease in the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and a communication device, which can improve the channel estimation accuracy of a codebook in a large-scale antenna array scenario.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method
- the execution subject of the method can be a terminal device or a chip applied to the terminal device, and the following description is taken as an example that the execution subject is a terminal device.
- the method includes: determining a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determining a combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis; sending a PMI, the PMI includes an identifier of the first spatial basis and a combination coefficient.
- each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the PMI sent by the terminal device, which includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient, can match the spatial position determined by the network device with the actual position of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis, further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits ⁇ d of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the spatial basis set is determined based on the maximum value r max and the minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. When the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array changes, the spatial basis set also changes accordingly. Therefore, the spatial basis set determined in this embodiment is more adapted to the actual position of the terminal device.
- determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d includes: determining a distance interval d gap according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
- the distance intervals d gap between different distance candidate values are the same, and the terminal device can determine d gap by receiving ⁇ d. Compared with receiving multiple d gaps (or the relationship between d gap and distance), this embodiment can reduce signaling complexity.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis, further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , wherein the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the correlation relationship is, for example, that d gap is positively correlated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. That is, the greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the greater the d gap ; the smaller the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the smaller the d gap . The greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the lower the estimated accuracy of the distance. Considering the resolution of the distance, the positive correlation between d gap and the distance can reduce the computational complexity of channel estimation.
- r max and r min are determined based on a timing advance (TA) of a signal between the antenna array and the terminal device.
- TA timing advance
- the multiplexing TA determines r max and r min , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
- the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: the identifier of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and the identifier of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis;
- the PMI also includes: a bitmap of non-zero coefficients, the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, L is the number of angle basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, D is the number of distance basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, and M is the number of frequency domain basis; the oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
- a non-zero coefficient is a combination coefficient that is not equal to 0.
- a bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis, and frequency domain basis.
- the oversampling rate of the distance basis can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set.
- a larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray
- determining a first spatial basis includes: determining first received data, second received data, r max , r min and ⁇ , wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and ⁇ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; processing the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and ⁇ through dictionary learning to obtain an angle basis of the first subarray, a distance basis of the first subarray, an angle basis of the second subarray and a distance basis of the second subarray; wherein the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis
- the codebook of the embodiment of the present application adds the distance dimension, the complexity of the channel estimation of the terminal device increases, the feedback overhead increases, and the power consumption increases.
- the terminal device can estimate the basis of different subarrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMI of multiple subarrays.
- the network device can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple subarrays and the PMI of the multiple subarrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device needs to process when estimating the basis of a subarray is reduced, the number of times the dictionary learning process performs loop nesting of distance and angle is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device.
- the first spatial domain basis includes: an angle basis of a first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; the combination coefficient is the combination coefficient of the first subarray, and the PMI also includes an identifier of the frequency domain basis of the first subarray; or, the first spatial domain basis includes: an angle basis of a second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray; the combination coefficient is the combination coefficient of the second subarray, and the PMI also includes an identifier of the frequency domain basis of the second subarray.
- the first subarray and the second subarray can share the frequency domain basis and the combined system.
- the spatial domain basis of one subarray can also be derived based on the spatial domain set of the other subarray and the geometric relationship between the two subarrays. Therefore, when sending PMI, the terminal device can send the identifier of the frequency domain basis, the identifier of the spatial domain basis and the coefficient of one subarray in the first subarray and the second subarray, thereby reducing the feedback overhead.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis, also includes: determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a target channel model based on d TA , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- the target channel model determined based on the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model. distance to the first object; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, the target channel model is determined to be the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, the target channel model is determined to be the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
- the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model to the first object; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
- the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than the third distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than the fourth distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of d TA to d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array includes: determining a TA of the first signal; and determining d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
- the multiplexing TA determines d TA , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
- the first signal is one of multiple signals; the multiple signals include a random access preamble, a sounding reference signal (SRS) and a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the first signal is SRS; or, the multiple signals include a random access preamble and DMRS, and the first signal is DMRS.
- the multiple signals include a random access preamble, a sounding reference signal (SRS) and a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the first signal is SRS; or, the multiple signals include a random access preamble and DMRS, and the first signal is DMRS.
- the TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
- the communication method before determining the TA of the first signal, also includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the TA; determining the TA of the first signal includes: determining the TA of the first signal according to the first indication information.
- the network device can determine TA based on the first signal and inform the terminal device of TA.
- the terminal device can determine d TA based on TA, and then determine the target channel model according to d TA . Therefore, this embodiment can reuse the existing process (the process of the terminal device obtaining TA) to determine the target channel model, thereby reducing the overhead of determining the target channel model.
- the communication method further includes: determining the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determining a target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- tra cur there is a correlation between tra cur and the target channel model. Different tra cur are suitable for different target channel models.
- the target channel model determined based on tra cur can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
- the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than the first trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are quite different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than the second trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between tra cur and tra ref, the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determining the target channel model to be the first channel model; if tra cur is The ratio of tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, and the target channel model is determined to be the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
- the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than the third trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device vary greatly, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device vary slightly and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of tra cur to tra ref , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied.
- Tra Ref may be a value pre-configured by the network device, a value defined by the protocol, an empirical value, or a value measured when the communication network is established.
- the frequency of receiving Tra Ref from the network device by the terminal device is reduced, or the terminal device does not need to receive Tra Ref from the network device, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining Tra Ref .
- the error of Tra Ref can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on Tra Ref is more accurate.
- the communication method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate tra ref ; and determining tra ref includes: determining tra ref according to the second indication information.
- the terminal device may obtain the latest tra ref through the second indication information.
- the latest tra ref is more consistent with the current channel condition. Therefore, the target channel model determined based on the latest tra ref is more accurate.
- trace is the average of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units.
- the error of tra cur can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on the tra cur is more accurate.
- the communication method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
- the terminal device After the terminal device determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial domain basis, also includes: receiving fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the target channel model according to the fourth indication information; determining the first spatial domain basis, including: determining the first spatial domain basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- the terminal device obtains the target channel model from the network device through the fourth indication information, and there is no need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining the target channel model.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method
- the execution subject of the method can be a network device or a chip applied to the network device, and the following description is taken as an example that the execution subject is a network device.
- the method includes: receiving a PMI, the PMI includes an identifier and a combination coefficient of a first spatial basis; determining the first spatial basis from a spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determining a precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
- each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the PMI sent by the terminal device, which includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient, can match the spatial position determined by the network device with the actual position of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits ⁇ d of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the spatial basis set is determined based on the maximum value r max and the minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. When the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array changes, the spatial basis set also changes accordingly. Therefore, the spatial basis set determined in this embodiment is more adapted to the actual position of the terminal device.
- determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d includes: determining a distance interval according to r max , r min and ⁇ d d gap ; determine the distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, also includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the correlation relationship is, for example, that d gap is positively correlated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, that is, the greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the greater the d gap ; and the smaller the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the smaller the d gap .
- r max and r min are determined based on the TA of the signal between the antenna array and the terminal device.
- the multiplexing TA determines r max and r min , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
- the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: the identifier of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and the identifier of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis;
- the PMI also includes: a bitmap of non-zero coefficients, the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, L is the number of angle basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, D is the number of distance basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, and M is the number of frequency domain basis; the oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
- a non-zero coefficient is a combination coefficient that is not equal to 0.
- a bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis, and frequency domain basis.
- the oversampling rate can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set.
- a larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray
- the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray.
- the first subarray and the second subarray can share the frequency domain basis and the combined system.
- the spatial domain basis of one subarray can also be derived based on the spatial domain set of the other subarray and the geometric relationship between the two subarrays. Therefore, when sending PMI, the terminal device can send the identifier of the frequency domain basis, the identifier of the spatial domain basis and the coefficient of one subarray in the first subarray and the second subarray, thereby reducing the feedback overhead.
- the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; determining the precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient includes: determining the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, and the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; determining the precoding matrix according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray, the distance basis of the second subarray and the combination coefficient.
- the codebook of the embodiment of the present application adds the distance dimension, the complexity of the channel estimation of the terminal device increases, the feedback overhead increases, and the power consumption increases.
- the terminal device can estimate the basis of different subarrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMI of multiple subarrays.
- the network device can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple subarrays and the PMI of the multiple subarrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device needs to process when estimating the basis of a subarray is reduced, the number of times the dictionary learning process performs loop nesting of distance and angle is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining the target channel model according to d TA , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- the target channel model determined based on the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determining the target channel model to be the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determining the target channel model to be the second channel model; wherein the first distance The distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
- the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model to the first object; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
- the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than the third distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than the fourth distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of d TA to d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array includes: determining a TA of the first signal; and determining d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
- the multiplexing TA determines d TA , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
- the first signal is one of multiple signals; the multiple signals include a random access preamble, an SRS and a DMRS, and the first signal is the SRS; or, the multiple signals include a random access preamble and a DMRS, and the first signal is the DMRS.
- the TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determining the target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- tra cur there is a correlation between tra cur and the target channel model. Different tra cur are suitable for different target channel models.
- the target channel model determined based on tra cur can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
- the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than the first trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are quite different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than the second trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than the third trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, and the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the terminal device vary greatly, so the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, and the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the terminal device vary slightly and can be considered equal, so the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model.
- the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- trace is the average of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units.
- the error of tra cur can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on the tra cur is more accurate.
- tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied.
- Tra Ref can be a value defined by a protocol, a value defined by a protocol, an empirical value, or a value measured when a communication network is established.
- the network device does not need to calculate Tra Ref , thereby reducing the power consumption of the network device in determining Tra Ref .
- the error of Tra Ref can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on Tra Ref is more accurate.
- the communication method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
- the network device After the network device determines the target channel model, it indicates the target channel model to the terminal device through the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining the target channel model.
- the communication method before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: receiving third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the target channel model according to the third indication information; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- the terminal device After the terminal device determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
- the communication method before receiving the third indication information, further includes: sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate TA, and TA is used to determine a target channel model.
- the network device can determine TA based on the first signal and inform the terminal device of TA.
- the terminal device can determine d TA based on TA, and then determine the target channel model according to d TA . Therefore, this embodiment can reuse the existing process (the process of the terminal device obtaining TA) to determine the target channel model, thereby reducing the overhead of determining the target channel model.
- the communication method before receiving the third indication information, also includes: sending second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the trace tra ref of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model, tra ref is the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple terminal devices applying the second channel model, and tra ref is used to determine the target channel model.
- the terminal device may obtain the latest tra ref through the second indication information.
- the latest tra ref is more consistent with the current channel condition. Therefore, the target channel model determined based on the latest tra ref is more accurate.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
- the communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiver unit, configured to execute: any one of the methods in the first aspect and its optional embodiments described above.
- the transceiver unit is a sending unit when executing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when executing the receiving step.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
- the communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiver unit, configured to execute: any method in the second aspect and its optional implementations described above.
- the transceiver unit is a sending unit when executing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when executing the receiving step.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a chip applied to a terminal device.
- the communication device may include a processor, configured to execute: any method in the above first aspect and its optional implementation manner.
- the processor is, for example, a system on chip (SoC) or a central processor unit (CPU); when the communication device is a chip, the processor is, for example, a core, which may include at least one execution unit (execution unit), such as an arithmetic and logic unit (ALU).
- SoC system on chip
- CPU central processor unit
- execution unit execution unit
- ALU arithmetic and logic unit
- the communication device may further include a transceiver.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an antenna, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the transceiver may be an input/output interface, a pin, a circuit, etc.
- the communication device may further include a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor executing the computer program or instruction stored in the memory so that the communication device performs any one of the above-mentioned first aspect and its optional implementation modes.
- the memory may be a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the memory may be a register, a cache, etc.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a chip applied to a network device.
- the communication device may include a processor, configured to execute: any method in the second aspect and its optional implementation manners described above.
- the processor is, for example, a CPU, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a field programmable gate array (FPGA); when the communication device is a chip, the processor is, for example, a core, which may include at least one execution unit, such as an ALU.
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- the communication device may further include a transceiver.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an antenna, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the transceiver may be an input/output interface, a pin, a circuit, etc.
- the communication device may further include a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor executing the computer program or instruction stored in the memory so that the communication device performs any one of the methods in the above-mentioned second aspect and its optional implementations.
- the memory may be a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the memory may be a register, a cache, etc.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program.
- the computer program When the computer program is executed on a computer, the computer executes any method in the first aspect and its optional embodiments.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program.
- the computer program When the computer program is executed on a computer, the computer executes any method in the second aspect and its optional implementation methods.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction.
- a computer program product which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction.
- the communication device executes any one of the methods in the first aspect and its optional embodiments.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction.
- a computer program product which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction.
- the communication device executes any one of the methods in the second aspect and its optional embodiments.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the present application.
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack applicable to the present application.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a far-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a near-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a geometric relationship provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 is a signaling interaction flow chart of a feedback PMI provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a flowchart of another signaling interaction for feeding back PMI provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is a signaling interaction flow chart for determining a target channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is another signaling interaction flow chart for determining a target channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart of signaling interaction for determining a target channel model according to another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG13 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the present application.
- the communication system includes a terminal device 110 and a network device 120. The following describes each part of the communication system.
- the terminal device 110 may be a device that provides voice and/or data to a user, for example, a handheld device or a vehicle-mounted device with a wireless connection function.
- the terminal device 110 may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), a terminal, an access station, a UE station, a remote station, a wireless communication device, or a user device.
- UE user equipment
- the terminal device 110 can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a whole vehicle, a wireless communication module in the whole vehicle, a telematics box (T-box), a road side unit (RSU), a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a smart speaker in the Internet of Things (IoT), a wireless terminal device in remote medical, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, or a wireless terminal device in a smart home.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific form adopted by the terminal device 110.
- the terminal device 110 may also be a wearable device.
- Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed using wearable technology for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
- a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
- wearable smart devices include electronic devices that are fully functional, large in size, and can achieve full or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, or electronic devices that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for measuring vital signs.
- the terminal device 110 may also be a vehicle-to-everything (V2X) device, such as a smart car (or intelligent car), a digital car, an unmanned car (or driverless car, or pilotless car, or automobile), a self-driving car (or autonomous car), a pure electric vehicle (or battery EV), a hybrid electric vehicle (or HEV), a range extended EV (or REEV), a plug-in hybrid electric vehicle (or PHEV), or a new energy vehicle (or new energy vehicle).
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- a smart car or intelligent car
- a digital car an unmanned car (or driverless car, or pilotless car, or automobile
- a self-driving car or autonomous car
- a pure electric vehicle or battery EV
- HEV hybrid electric vehicle
- REEV range extended EV
- PHEV plug-in hybrid electric vehicle
- new energy vehicle or new energy vehicle.
- OBUs on-board units
- the terminal device 110 of the present application may also be a vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units.
- the vehicle may implement the method of the present application through the built-in vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit.
- the terminal device 110 may also be a device in a future-evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), for example, the terminal device 110 may be a terminal device in a sixth generation mobile communication technology (6G) system.
- PLMN public land mobile network
- 6G sixth generation mobile communication technology
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the terminal device 110.
- the network device 120 is a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminal devices and is responsible for functions related to the air interface (abbreviated as "air interface").
- the network equipment 120 can also be called a network device or a radio access network (RAN) device.
- the network equipment 120 includes but is not limited to: a base station (BS), an evolved base station (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation base station (next generation nodeB, gNB) in the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system, a next generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) system, a long range radio (LoRa) system or an access node in a vehicle networking system.
- BS base station
- eNodeB evolved base station
- TRP transmission reception point
- gNB next generation base station
- 5G fifth generation
- 6G mobile communication system a next generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system
- a base station in a future mobile communication system a wireless fidelity (WiFi) system
- WiFi wireless fidelity
- LoRa long range
- the RAN device can be a module or unit that completes part of the functions of the base station, for example, it can be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), or a radio unit (RU).
- the CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP);
- the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete the functions of part of the physical layer or all of the physical layer.
- 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
- the CU and DU can be set separately, or they can be included in the same network element, such as the baseband unit (BBU).
- the RU can be included in the radio frequency device or radio frequency unit, for example, in the radio remote unit
- the antenna is located in a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU) or a remote radio head (RRH).
- CU, DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings.
- CU may also be called an open CU (open CU, O-CU)
- DU may also be called an open DU (open DU, O-DU)
- RU may also be called an open RU (open RU, O-RU).
- Any unit in the CU, DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
- the RAN device may be a macro base station, a micro base station, an indoor station, a relay node or a donor node, etc.
- the RAN device may also be a base station corresponding to a small cell, where the small cell may include: a metro cell, a micro cell, a pico cell or a femto cell.
- the network device 120 in the embodiment of the present application may be any of the above devices or devices in the device, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device 120.
- the RAN device may be used as an abbreviation for the network device 120, and the base station is used as an example of the RAN device.
- Base stations and terminals can be fixed or movable. Base stations and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water surface; they can also be deployed on airplanes, balloons, and artificial satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of base stations and terminals.
- a drone (or a helicopter) can be configured as a mobile base station.
- the drone is a base station; but for the network device 120, the drone is a terminal, that is, the network device 120 and the drone communicate through the wireless air interface protocol.
- the network device 120 and the drone can also communicate through the interface protocol between base stations.
- the drone is also a base station. Therefore, both the base station and the terminal can be collectively referred to as a communication device.
- the network device 120 in Figure 1 can be referred to as a communication device with a base station function
- the terminal device 110 in Figure 1 can be referred to as a communication device with a terminal function.
- Base stations and terminals, base stations and base stations, and terminals and terminals can communicate through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both; they can communicate through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz.
- GHz gigahertz
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
- the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function.
- the control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the above-mentioned application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, and smart city.
- the functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.
- the base station sends a downlink signal or downlink information to the terminal, and the downlink information is carried on the downlink channel;
- the terminal sends an uplink signal or uplink information to the base station, and the uplink information is carried on the uplink channel.
- the terminal In order to communicate with the base station, the terminal needs to establish a wireless connection on the cell controlled by the base station.
- the cell with which the terminal has established a wireless connection is called the service cell of the terminal.
- the service cell When the terminal communicates with the service cell, it will also be interfered by signals from neighboring cells.
- the protocol stack of the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is shown in Figure 2.
- the protocol stack is mainly the protocol stack of the access layer, wherein the access layer can be divided into a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a PDCP layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, a MAC layer and a physical (PHY) layer.
- RRC radio resource control
- RLC radio link control
- PHY physical
- the main functions of the RRC layer include system messages, admission control, security management, measurement and reporting, as well as switching and mobility.
- the control plane data related to these functions is generated in the non-access stratum (NAS).
- the RRC layer is also responsible for the radio resource management of the transmission of NAS protocol data units (PDUs). After the NAS PDU reaches the RRC layer, it is processed as an RRC service data unit (SDU) to generate an RRC PDU.
- SDU RRC service data unit
- the control plane data generated by the RRC layer (such as RRC reconfiguration messages) will also be packaged into RRC PDUs.
- the main functions of the PDCP layer include transmitting user plane and control plane data, maintaining PDCP sequence numbers, routing and repetition, encryption/decryption and integrity protection, reordering, supporting out-of-order delivery, and duplicate discard.
- the RRC PDU After the RRC PDU reaches the PDCP layer, it is processed as a PDCP SDU to generate a PDCP PDU.
- the main functions of the RLC layer include error detection and correction, segmentation and reassembly, resegmentation, and duplicate packet detection.
- the main functions of the MAC layer include mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing/demultiplexing, scheduling, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), and logical channel priority setting.
- the main functions of the PHY layer include coding, modulation, and multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO). After the MAC PDU reaches the PHY layer, it is sent out on the corresponding time-frequency resources.
- MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
- SDU data transmitted between the same protocol layers
- PDU data transmitted between adjacent protocol layers
- SDU data transmitted between adjacent protocol layers
- PDU data transmitted between adjacent protocol layers
- the data processed by the RRC layer of the terminal device 110 is RRC SDU.
- the RRC layer adds protocol control information (PCI) to the RRC SDU and encapsulates it into RRC PDU.
- PCI protocol control information
- the RRC PDU is processed by the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the PHY layer, and then transmitted to the network device 120 via a wireless signal.
- the information carried by the wireless signal reaching the network device 120 is processed by the PHY layer, the MAC layer, the RLC layer, and the PDCP layer in sequence, and reaches the RRC layer in the form of RRC PDU.
- the RRC layer decapsulates the RRC PDU, removes the PCI, and restores the RRC SDU.
- the terminal device 110 can divide the SDU into multiple segments, encapsulate them into multiple PDUs and send them out, and the network device 120 decapsulates the multiple PDUs and reassembles them into SDUs. If the data volume of multiple SDUs is small, the terminal device 110 can splice the multiple SDUs together, encapsulate them into one PDU and send them out, and the network device 120 decapsulates the PDU and separates the multiple SDUs.
- the transmitting device (such as a network device) can process the signal to be transmitted with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel state, so that the precoded signal to be transmitted is adapted to the channel, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as a terminal device) in eliminating the influence between channels. Therefore, by precoding the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (such as the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)) is improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize the transmission of the transmitting device and multiple receiving devices on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.
- SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
- the sending device can also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (e.g., channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a pre-set precoding matrix or weighted processing method. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated.
- channel information e.g., channel matrix
- CSI Channel state information
- a CSI report may include: PMI, rank indication (RI), channel quality indicator (CQI), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI), and layer indicator (LI), etc.
- RI rank indication
- CQI channel quality indicator
- CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
- LI layer indicator
- PMI can be used to indicate a precoding matrix, which can be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on a channel matrix of each frequency domain unit, which can be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity.
- the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition (EVD) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix.
- SVD singular value decomposition
- EVD eigenvalue decomposition
- the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device may be referred to as the precoding matrix to be fed back, or the precoding matrix to be reported.
- the terminal device may indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through the PMI, so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
- the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same as or similar to the precoding matrix to be fed back.
- the network device can determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device.
- the precoding matrix thus determined by the network device can be directly used for downlink data transmission; or it can be processed to obtain the precoding matrix finally used for downlink data transmission.
- the beamforming method is, for example: zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), or maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise ratio (SLR) SLNR) etc. This application does not limit this.
- PMI is only an exemplary name and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
- the present application does not exclude the possibility of defining signaling with other names in future protocols to represent the same or similar functions.
- a spatial layer may also be referred to as a transport layer, layer, transport stream, spatial stream, or stream.
- the number of spatial layers may be determined by the rank fed back by the terminal device based on channel measurement. For example, the number of spatial layers may be equal to the rank fed back by the terminal device based on channel measurement.
- a spatial layer can be regarded as an independently transmittable data stream.
- network equipment can transmit data to terminal equipment through multiple spatial layers.
- the number of spatial layers is the rank of the channel matrix.
- the terminal device can determine the number of spatial layers R according to the channel matrix obtained by channel estimation, and further determine the precoding matrix.
- the precoding matrix can be determined by performing SVD on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. In the SVD process, different spatial layers can be distinguished according to the size of the eigenvalue. For example, the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue can be corresponded to the first spatial layer, and the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the smallest eigenvalue can be corresponded to the Rth spatial layer. That is, the eigenvalues corresponding to the first spatial layer to the Rth spatial layer decrease successively. Simply put, the strength of the R spatial layers decreases from the first spatial layer to the Rth spatial layer.
- a precoding matrix may include one or more vectors, such as column vectors.
- a precoding matrix may be used to determine one or more precoding vectors.
- the precoding matrix is the precoding vector.
- the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix on one spatial layer.
- the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one polarization direction.
- the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one spatial layer and one polarization direction.
- the precoding vector may also be determined by a vector in a precoding matrix, for example, obtained by mathematically transforming the vector in the precoding matrix.
- the present application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
- the antenna port can be referred to as a port for short. It can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
- An antenna port can be preconfigured for each virtual antenna, and each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas.
- Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, a CSI-RS port, an SRS port, etc.
- the reference signal can be a non-precoded reference signal or a precoded reference signal, and the present application does not limit this.
- the reference signal is a precoded reference signal
- the reference signal port can be a transmitting antenna port, and the transmitting antenna port can refer to an independent transceiver unit (transceiver unit).
- the spatial basis can also be called a spatial domain vector, a spatial component vector, a beam vector, a spatial beam basis vector, or a spatial basis vector.
- Each element in the spatial vector can represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the spatial vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
- the length of the spatial domain vector may be the number of transmit antenna ports in one polarization direction, N s , where N s ⁇ 1 and is an integer.
- the spatial domain vector may be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length N s . This application does not limit this.
- the spatial domain vector is a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) vector.
- the DFT vector may refer to a vector in a DFT matrix.
- the spatial domain vector is a conjugate transposed vector of the DFT vector.
- the DFT conjugate transposed vector may refer to a column vector in a conjugate transposed matrix of the DFT matrix.
- the spatial domain vector is an oversampled DFT vector.
- the oversampled DFT vector may refer to a vector in an oversampled DFT matrix.
- the spatial domain vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix.
- the spatial basis set may also be referred to as a candidate spatial vector set, a candidate spatial component vector set, a spatial component vector set, a candidate spatial basis vector set, a spatial basis vector set, a candidate beam vector set, a beam vector set, a candidate spatial beam basis vector set, a spatial beam basis vector set, etc.
- a plurality of spatial vectors (or candidate spatial vectors) of different lengths may be included to correspond to different numbers of antenna ports.
- the spatial vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the candidate spatial vector set.
- the candidate spatial vector set includes a plurality of candidate spatial vectors that can be used to construct the precoding vector.
- the candidate spatial vector set may include Ns candidate spatial vectors, and the Ns candidate spatial vectors may be mutually orthogonal.
- Ns candidate spatial vectors can be recorded as The N s candidate spatial vectors can construct the matrix B s .
- the matrix Bs can be used for the spatial compression described below to select one or more candidate spatial vectors for constructing a precoding matrix. If each candidate spatial vector in the set of candidate spatial vectors is taken from a 2D-DFT matrix, then Where D N represents an N ⁇ N orthogonal DFT matrix, and the element in the mth row and nth column of the orthogonal DFT matrix is
- the candidate spatial domain vector set can be expanded to Os ⁇ Ns candidate spatial domain vectors by an oversampling factor Os .
- the candidate spatial domain vector set can include Os subsets, and each subset can include Ns candidate spatial domain vectors.
- the Ns candidate spatial domain vectors in each subset can be mutually orthogonal.
- Each candidate spatial domain vector in the candidate spatial domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix.
- the oversampling factor Os is a positive integer
- Os O1 ⁇ O2
- O1 can be an oversampling factor in the horizontal direction
- O2 can be an oversampling factor in the vertical direction.
- O1 ⁇ 1, O2 ⁇ 1, O1 and O2 are not 1 at the same time, and both are positive integers.
- the N s candidate spatial domain vectors in the o s th subset (0 ⁇ o s ⁇ O s -1, and o s is an integer) of the candidate spatial domain vector set can be respectively recorded as Then based on the N s candidate spatial vectors in the o sth subset, the matrix can be constructed A matrix consisting of one or more subsets of the O s subsets may be used to perform the spatial domain compression described below to select one or more spatial domain vectors for constructing a precoding matrix.
- the frequency domain unit is a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different frequency domain resource granularities.
- the frequency domain unit may include, for example, a subband, a resource block (RB), a subcarrier, a resource block group (RBG), or a precoding resource block group (PRG).
- the frequency domain length of a frequency domain unit may also be R times the CQI subband, where R is less than or equal to 1, and the value of R may be, for example, 1, or the value of R may be pre-configured to the terminal device by the network device through signaling.
- the frequency domain length of a frequency domain unit may also be RB.
- the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by channel measurement and feedback based on a reference signal on the frequency domain unit.
- the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may be used to precode data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit.
- the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit.
- the frequency domain basis can also be called a frequency domain vector, a frequency domain component vector, or a frequency domain basis vector, etc., which can be used to represent the changing pattern of the channel in the frequency domain.
- Each frequency domain vector can represent a changing pattern.
- Multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of the frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the changing pattern of the channel in the frequency domain caused by the delay on different transmission paths.
- the length of the frequency domain vector can be denoted as Nf , where Nf is a positive integer.
- the frequency domain vector can be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length Nf .
- the length of the frequency domain vector can be determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported preconfigured in the reporting bandwidth, or by the length of the reporting bandwidth, or by a protocol predefined value. This application does not limit the length of the frequency domain vector.
- the reporting bandwidth can, for example, refer to the CSI reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) carried in the CSI reporting preconfiguration in the high-level signaling.
- the frequency domain vectors corresponding to all spatial domain vectors corresponding to each spatial layer may be referred to as the frequency domain vectors corresponding to the spatial layer.
- the frequency domain vectors corresponding to each spatial layer may be the same or different.
- the frequency domain basis set may also be referred to as a candidate frequency domain vector set, a candidate frequency domain component vector set, a frequency domain component vector set, a frequency domain basis vector set, or a frequency domain vector set, etc., and may include candidate frequency domain vectors of multiple different lengths.
- the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the candidate frequency domain vector set.
- the candidate frequency domain vector set includes multiple candidate frequency domain vectors that can be used to construct the precoding vector.
- the candidate frequency domain vector set may include N f candidate frequency domain vectors.
- the N f candidate frequency domain vectors may be mutually orthogonal.
- Each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set may be a vector in a DFT matrix or an inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT) matrix, wherein the IDFT matrix is a conjugate transposed matrix of the DFT matrix.
- IDFT inverse discrete Fourier transform
- the N f candidate frequency domain vectors can be expressed as The N f candidate frequency domain vectors can construct the matrix B f , This matrix may be used to perform frequency domain compression as described below to select one or more frequency domain vectors used to construct a precoding matrix.
- the candidate frequency domain vector set can be expanded to Of ⁇ Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors by an oversampling factor Of .
- the candidate frequency domain vector set can include Of subsets, each of which can include Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors.
- the Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors in each subset can be mutually orthogonal.
- Each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix or a conjugate transposed matrix of an oversampled DFT matrix.
- the oversampling factor Of is a positive integer.
- each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix, or from a conjugate transposed matrix of a DFT matrix or a conjugate transposed matrix of an oversampled DFT matrix.
- Each column vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be called a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
- the candidate frequency domain vector can be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
- a space-frequency vector pair can also be called a space-frequency component vector.
- a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector can be combined to obtain a space-frequency vector pair.
- a space-frequency vector pair can include a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
- a space-frequency component matrix can be obtained by the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector in a space-frequency vector pair.
- a space-frequency component matrix can be obtained by multiplying a space-domain vector with the conjugate transpose of a frequency-domain vector.
- the space-frequency component matrix described here is relative to the space-frequency matrix described below. Since a space-frequency matrix can be obtained by weighted summation of multiple space-frequency component matrices, each item used for weighting can be called a component of a space-frequency matrix, i.e., the space-frequency component matrix mentioned here.
- the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix or channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
- the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
- the space-frequency matrix can be obtained by the weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices to restore the channel matrix or precoding matrix.
- the space-frequency matrix can be denoted as W, Among them, w 0 to There are N f column vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units, and each column vector may be a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
- the N f column vectors correspond to the precoding vectors of the N f frequency domain units, respectively. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix composed of the precoding vectors corresponding to the N f frequency domain units.
- the space-frequency matrix may correspond to the spatial layer.
- the space-frequency matrix is said to correspond to the spatial layer because the terminal device can feedback the frequency domain vector and the space-frequency combining coefficient based on each spatial layer.
- the space-frequency matrix determined by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device is the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer.
- the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer can be directly used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
- the precoding matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit can be constructed by, for example, the column vector corresponding to the same frequency domain unit in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer.
- the nth (0 ⁇ n ⁇ N 3 -1, and n is an integer) column vector in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer is extracted and arranged from left to right in the order of the spatial layer to obtain a matrix of dimension N s ⁇ Z, where Z represents the number of spatial layers, and Z ⁇ 1 is an integer.
- the matrix is normalized, for example, multiplied by a power normalization coefficient, to obtain the precoding matrix of the nth frequency domain unit.
- the space-frequency matrix is only a form of expression for determining an intermediate quantity of a precoding matrix or a channel matrix, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
- a vector with a length of Ns ⁇ Nf can also be obtained, which can be called a space-frequency vector.
- the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and the space-frequency vector shown above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
- the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix with a dimension of Nf ⁇ Ns .
- Each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit, which is used to determine the corresponding The precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
- the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded.
- the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2Ns ⁇ Nf or Nf ⁇ 2Ns . It should be understood that the present application does not limit the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna.
- the combination coefficient may also be referred to as a space-frequency combining coefficient, a space-frequency coefficient, a combining coefficient, or a weighted coefficient, etc.
- Each space-frequency combining coefficient may correspond to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, or in other words, each space-frequency combining coefficient may correspond to a space-frequency vector pair.
- Each space-frequency combining coefficient is a weighted coefficient (or, weight) of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by the space-frequency vector pair to which it corresponds.
- the space-frequency combining coefficient corresponds to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
- the element in the i-th row and j-th column of the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix is the space-frequency combining coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair formed by the i-th space-domain vector and the j-th frequency-domain vector.
- the above i ⁇ 1,2,...,2L ⁇ , and the length of each space-domain vector is 2N s .
- the terminal device may only report the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix
- the network device may configure the maximum number of space-frequency combining coefficients K 0 that can be reported by the terminal device corresponding to each spatial layer, where K 0 ⁇ 2LM.
- the terminal device may report only K 1 space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitudes, where K 1 ⁇ K 0 .
- Each space-frequency combining coefficient may include an amplitude and a phase.
- a is the amplitude and ⁇ is the phase.
- the quantization method for the amplitude includes the following steps:
- the terminal device reports the index of the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value.
- the indication information indicating the index of the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value may include: Bit.
- the quantization reference amplitude value is 1.
- the amplitude of the space-frequency combination coefficient with the largest amplitude in this polarization direction can be used as the quantization reference amplitude value of this polarization direction.
- the quantization reference amplitude value is quantized and reported using 4 bits.
- the candidate quantization reference amplitude values include
- the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction is used as a reference, and the differential amplitude value of each space-frequency combining coefficient is quantized by 3 bits.
- the candidate differential amplitude values include The differential amplitude value represents the difference value relative to the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction. If the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction of a space-frequency combining coefficient is A, and the differential amplitude value of the space-frequency combining coefficient after quantization is B, then the amplitude value of the space-frequency combining coefficient after quantization is A*B.
- phase of each normalized space-frequency combining coefficient is quantized by 3 bits or 4 bits, where 3 bits can be used for 8-phase shift keying (PSK) scenarios and 4 bits can be used for 16PSK scenarios.
- PSK 8-phase shift keying
- each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a space-frequency combining coefficient.
- the amplitude values of some space-frequency combining coefficients may be zero, or close to zero, and the corresponding quantization value may be zero.
- the space-frequency combining coefficients whose amplitude is quantized by the quantization value zero can be called the space-frequency combining coefficients with zero amplitude.
- the amplitude values of some space-frequency combining coefficients are large, and the corresponding quantization values are not zero.
- the space-frequency combining coefficients whose amplitude is quantized by a non-zero quantization value can be called the space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
- the multiple space-frequency combining coefficients corresponding to the multiple space-frequency vector pairs can be composed of one or more space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitude and one or more space-frequency combining coefficients with zero amplitude.
- the space-frequency combining coefficient can be indicated by a quantized value, by an index of a quantized value, or by a non-quantized value.
- the present application does not limit the indication method of the space-frequency combining coefficient, as long as the receiving end can obtain the space-frequency combining coefficient.
- the information used to indicate the space-frequency combining coefficient is referred to as the quantization information of the space-frequency combining coefficient.
- the quantization information may be, for example, a quantization value, an index or any other information that may be used to indicate the space-frequency combining coefficient.
- Dual-domain compression may include compression in two dimensions: spatial domain compression and frequency domain compression.
- Spatial domain compression may specifically refer to selecting one or more spatial domain vectors from a set of spatial domain vectors as vectors for constructing a precoding matrix.
- Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as vectors for constructing a precoding matrix.
- a matrix constructed by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector may be referred to as a space-frequency component matrix.
- the selected one or more spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors may construct one or more space-frequency component matrices.
- the weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices may be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to a spatial layer.
- the space-frequency matrix may be approximated as the weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrices constructed by the above-selected one or more spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors.
- the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the spatial layer may be determined.
- the selected one or more spatial domain vectors may constitute a matrix W 1 , where each column vector in W 1 corresponds to a selected spatial domain vector.
- the selected one or more frequency domain vectors may constitute a matrix W 3 , where each column vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector.
- the space-frequency matrix W may be represented as a result of linearly combining the selected one or more spatial domain vectors and the selected one or more frequency domain vectors. Taking the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer as an example, the space-frequency matrix corresponding to a spatial layer may be represented as
- the spatial domain vectors used by each spatial layer may not be exactly the same, that is, each spatial layer uses an independent spatial domain vector; the spatial domain vectors used by each spatial layer may also be the same, that is, multiple spatial layers share L spatial domain vectors.
- the frequency domain vectors used by each spatial layer may not be exactly the same, that is, each spatial layer uses an independent frequency domain vector; the frequency domain vectors used by each spatial layer may also be the same, that is, multiple spatial layers share M frequency domain vectors. Assume that each spatial layer uses its own independent frequency domain vector.
- the i-th (0 ⁇ i ⁇ R-1, i is an integer) spatial layer among the R spatial layers corresponds to Mi frequency domain vectors, that is, the frequency domain vectors corresponding to the i-th spatial layer reported by the terminal device are Mi. Where Mi ⁇ 1, and Mi is an integer.
- the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the i-th spatial layer may be constructed based on the above L spatial domain vectors and M i frequency domain vectors.
- L spatial vectors can be selected for each polarization direction.
- the dimension of W1 can be 2Ns ⁇ 2L.
- the same L spatial vectors can be used for the two polarization directions. in, For example, it can be L spatial vectors selected from the spatial vector set mentioned above. In this case, W1 can be expressed as:
- Represents the i-th spatial domain vector among the selected L spatial domain vectors, i 0, 1,..., L-1.
- the dimension of W 3 H may be Mi ⁇ N f .
- Each column vector in W 3 may be a frequency domain vector.
- each spatial domain vector in W 1 and each frequency domain vector in W 3 may constitute a space-frequency vector pair, and each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a space-frequency combining coefficient.
- the i-th spatial layer It may be a coefficient matrix composed of the above 2L ⁇ M i space-frequency combining coefficients, and its dimension may be 2L ⁇ M i .
- the lth row in can correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction among the 2L spatial vectors.
- the L+lth row in can correspond to the lth spatial domain vector in the second polarization direction among the 2L spatial domain vectors.
- the m-th (0 ⁇ m ⁇ M i -1, and m is an integer) column in can correspond to the m-th frequency domain vector among the M i frequency domain vectors.
- the frequency domain vector and the spatial domain vector corresponding to each of the R spatial layers are selected to construct the position of the space-frequency vector pair of the precoding matrix and the space-frequency combining coefficients of each space-frequency vector pair.
- the position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix specifically refers to the position of the space-domain vector of the precoding matrix used to construct the space-domain vector reported by the terminal device and the position of the frequency-domain vector of the precoding matrix used to construct the space-domain vector reported by the terminal device. Since each space-frequency vector pair corresponds to a non-zero space-frequency combining coefficient (referred to as a non-zero coefficient), the position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix is also the position of the non-zero coefficient.
- each row vector in W 3 may correspond to a selected frequency domain vector.
- the terminal device can feed back one or more selected spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device when giving feedback, and no longer needs to feed back the spatial-frequency combining coefficients based on each frequency domain unit. Therefore, dual-domain compression can reduce feedback overhead.
- the frequency domain vector can represent the frequency variation law of the channel
- the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the variation of the channel in the frequency domain, which can maintain a high feedback accuracy, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be well adapted to the channel.
- the specific process of the terminal device determining the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the terminal device, and this application does not limit the specific process of the terminal device determining the PMI.
- the specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix based on the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the network device, and this application does not limit the specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
- the terminal device may report the following information to the network device through the PMI:
- the W3 matrix corresponding to each spatial layer contains the indices of the frequency domain vectors.
- the index of the spatial domain vector and the index of the frequency domain vector may be referred to as a codebook index.
- the network device determines the corresponding spatial domain vector and frequency domain vector from the codebook based on the codebook index to restore the channel matrix or the precoding matrix.
- Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of a far-field channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the distances from each antenna element in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer are approximately the same, and the propagation of electromagnetic waves satisfies the plane wave law. Therefore, the far-field channel model needs to consider the multipath angle parameter, but does not need to consider the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer.
- Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a near-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the distances from each antenna element in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer vary greatly, and the propagation of electromagnetic waves satisfies the law of spherical waves. Therefore, in addition to considering the multipath angle parameter, the near-field channel model also needs to consider the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer.
- the area of antenna arrays of network equipment has further increased.
- the Rayleigh distance will increase exponentially with the increase of the area of the antenna array.
- the Rayleigh distance is defined as
- r is the Rayleigh distance
- D is the area of the antenna array
- ⁇ is the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave
- the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of the spherical wavefront, the signal phase at different locations is distorted, which increases the mismatch risk of the traditional codebook.
- traditional codebooks include frequency-domain-angle dual-domain compression codebooks, frequency-domain-angle reciprocity codebooks, and frequency-domain-angle dual-domain compression codebooks that are further compressed in time. These codebooks do not consider the distance dimension. The spatial position determined based on the traditional codebook does not match the actual position of the terminal device, resulting in a decrease in the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the method 500 includes:
- the terminal device 110 determines a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device 120 and the first object.
- each antenna may be an antenna that supports switching between left-hand circular polarization or right-hand circular polarization, or an antenna that supports both left-hand circular polarization and right-hand circular polarization, or an antenna that supports linear polarization.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific type of the antenna array.
- the antenna in the antenna array may be an end-fire circular polarization antenna, an end-ray polarization antenna, an edge-fire circular polarization antenna, or an edge-ray polarization antenna.
- the antennas in the antenna array may be the same or different.
- the first object is the scatterer closest to the antenna array. If the multipath between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is a line-of-sight (LoS) path, the first object is the terminal device 110. If the multipath between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is a non-line-of-sight (non-LoS) path, the first object is the scatterer closest to the antenna array. Scatterers can refer to any object in the real world, such as buildings, terrain, and vegetation in the environment.
- different spatial basis correspond to different multipaths.
- the terminal device 110 Before determining the first spatial domain basis, the terminal device 110 needs to determine a distance candidate value set, and then determine the spatial domain according to the distance candidate value set. Basis set. The following describes an example of a method for the terminal device 110 to determine a distance candidate value set.
- Method 1 for determining a set of candidate distance values.
- the terminal device 110 determines a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a quantization bit number ⁇ d of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array; and determines a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d.
- r max and r min may be determined based on the TA of the signal between the antenna array and the terminal device 110 .
- the terminal device 110 may calculate the TA itself or receive the TA from the network device 120 .
- the terminal device 110 may also directly receive r max and r min from the network device 120 .
- the terminal device 110 receives a first signal from the network device 120 and determines the TA of the first signal.
- the TA of the first signal has an error range, and r max and r min can be determined based on the upper limit and the lower limit of the error range.
- the network device 120 receives a first signal from the terminal device 110 and determines the TA of the first signal.
- the TA of the first signal has an error range.
- the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the error range.
- the terminal device 110 can determine r max and r min based on the upper and lower limits of the error range.
- the network device 120 receives a first signal from the terminal device 110 and determines the TA of the first signal.
- the TA of the first signal has an error range.
- r max and r min can be determined based on the upper and lower limits of the error range. Then, the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of r max and r min .
- the distance interval d gap may be determined according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; the distance candidate value set is determined according to r max , r min and d gap , wherein the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
- the d gap may be obtained from the network device 120 .
- the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap , which means that the intervals between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set are equal.
- the distance candidate value set r may be ⁇ r min , r min +d gap , r min +2d gap , . . . , r max ⁇ , where r min and r min +d gap are two adjacent distance candidate values, and r min +d gap and r min +2d gap are two adjacent distance candidate values.
- Method 2 for determining a set of distance candidate values.
- the method for the terminal device 110 to determine r max and r min is the same as the method for determining r max and r min in the first method for determining the distance candidate value set, and will not be repeated herein.
- the terminal device 110 may obtain d gap from the network device 120 .
- the network device 120 may send d gaps corresponding to different distances to the terminal device 110.
- the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap1 according to r min , and then calculates the sum of r min and d gap1 to obtain r min + d gap1 ; then the terminal device 110 calculates the sum of r min + d gap1 and d gap2 according to the interval d gap2 corresponding to r min + d gap1 , and obtains r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ; and so on, until the distance candidate value r min + d gap1 + d gap2 +...+ d gapn closest to r max is calculated, and a distance candidate value set r is obtained, where r may be ⁇ r min , r min + d gap1 , r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ,..., r min + d gap1 + d gap2 +...+ d gapn
- the network device 120 may send a function (or "variation relationship") of d gap varying with distance to the terminal device 110.
- the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap1 according to r min and the function, and then calculates the sum of r min and d gap1 to obtain r min + d gap1 ; then the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap2 according to r min + d gap1 and the function, and then calculates the sum of r min + d gap1 and d gap2 to obtain r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ; and so on, until the calculated distance candidate value r min + d gap1 + d gap2 + ...
- r may be ⁇ r min , r min + d gap1 , r min + d gap1 + d gap2 , ..., r min + d gap1 + d gap2 + ... + d gapn , r max ⁇ .
- the intervals between two adjacent distance candidate values are different, that is, d gap1 is different from d gap2 .
- the terminal device 110 may determine the angle candidate value set, and determine the spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the angle candidate value set according to 3GPP TS 38.214 V16.4.0 (2020-12).
- the terminal device 110 may determine the spatial basis set according to formula (1) and formula (2).
- ⁇ i is the angle distance fusion parameter of the i-th vibrator in the antenna array
- d is the multipath distance from the reference vibrator in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer (i.e., the value in the distance candidate value set)
- the multipath angle i.e., the value in the angle candidate value set
- ri is the position of the i-th element in the antenna array
- the reference vibrator can be the vibrator with the shortest distance to the nearest scatterer among the vibrators in the antenna array
- i is a positive integer.
- a i is the spatial basis (also called the steering vector) of the i-th oscillator in the antenna array
- e is a natural constant
- j is the imaginary part
- f is the carrier frequency
- c is the speed of light
- n is the number of columns of the i-th oscillator
- m is the number of rows of the i-th oscillator
- d x is the spacing of the oscillators in the antenna array in the horizontal dimension
- dy is the spacing of the oscillators in the antenna array in the vertical dimension
- ⁇ x is the component of ⁇ i in the horizontal dimension
- ⁇ y is the component of ⁇ i in the vertical dimension.
- d x and d y can be obtained from the network device 120, or can be equal to half a wavelength by default.
- the terminal device 110 can obtain the number of vibrators N1 in the horizontal dimension and the number of vibrators N2 in the vertical dimension of the antenna array from the network device 120, calculate the ⁇ i and ai of each vibrator, the set consisting of the ⁇ i of all vibrators is the angle basis set, and the set consisting of the ai of all vibrators is the spatial basis set.
- the above method for determining the spatial basis set is an example rather than a limitation.
- the terminal device 110 determines the spatial basis set, it can determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set.
- the antenna array may be divided into a plurality of sub-arrays, and the terminal device 110 may determine the first spatial basis based on the sub-arrays.
- the antenna array may be divided into a first subarray and a second subarray
- the terminal device 110 determines first received data, second received data, r max , r min and ⁇ , wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array, and ⁇ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; the terminal device 110 processes the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and ⁇ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray.
- the dictionary learning algorithm is as follows.
- h(x, y) represents the channel
- W(r) represents the dictionary used for channel estimation , that is, the angle basis set and the distance basis set
- s represents the transmitted signal.
- bN represents the steering vector
- ⁇ 1 to ⁇ N represent the candidate values of the multipath angles from the N subarrays to the nearest scatterer
- r1 to rN represent the candidate values of the multipath distances from the N subarrays to the nearest scatterer.
- ⁇ 1 represents the candidate value of the multipath angle from the first subarray to the nearest scatterer
- ⁇ 2 represents the candidate value of the multipath angle from the second subarray to the nearest scatterer
- r1 represents the candidate value of the multipath distance from the first subarray to the nearest scatterer
- r2 represents the candidate value of the multipath distance from the second subarray to the nearest scatterer
- ⁇ represents the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray.
- the transmitted signal s can also be divided into two parts. Accordingly, the two signals received by the terminal device 110 are y1 and y2 , where y1 is the first received data and y2 is the second received data.
- the terminal device 110 calculates initial dictionaries W 1 (r) and W 2 (r) using r max and all angles;
- the multipath delay, multipath angle, multipath distance, and combination coefficient estimated by the first subarray, as well as the multipath delay, multipath angle, multipath distance, and combination coefficient estimated by the second subarray can be obtained.
- the spatial domain basis including the distance basis and the angle basis
- the frequency domain basis can be calculated.
- each sub-array includes at least one vibrator, and the number of vibrators included in each sub-array may be the same or different.
- the terminal device 110 determines the angle basis and the distance basis of the first subarray, and the angle basis and the distance basis of the second subarray, it can report them in the following ways:
- Reporting method 1 ⁇ , r 1 , ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 .
- Reporting method 2 ⁇ , r 2 , ⁇ 2 and ⁇ 2 .
- Reporting method three ⁇ , r 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 .
- Reporting method four ⁇ , r 2 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 .
- Reporting method five ⁇ , r 1 , ⁇ 1 , r 2 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 .
- ⁇ is the index of the frequency domain basis shared by the first subarray and the second subarray
- r1 is the index of the distance basis of the first subarray
- r2 is the index of the distance basis of the second subarray
- ⁇ 1 is the index of the angle basis of the first subarray
- ⁇ 2 is the index of the angle basis of the second subarray
- ⁇ 1 is the combination coefficient of the first subarray
- ⁇ 2 is the combination coefficient of the second subarray.
- the network device 120 can derive the angle basis and distance basis of the second subarray based on the geometric relationship shown in FIG6 and the angle basis and distance basis of the first subarray, or the network device 120 can derive the angle basis and distance basis of the first subarray based on the geometric relationship shown in FIG6 and the angle basis and distance basis of the second subarray. Therefore, the terminal device 110 can reduce the feedback overhead through reporting mode 1 to reporting mode 4.
- ⁇ 1 is equal to ⁇ 2
- the terminal device 110 can further reduce the feedback overhead through reporting mode 1 and reporting mode 2; if it is believed that the combination coefficients of the same multipath are different, ⁇ 1 is not equal to ⁇ 2 , and the terminal device 110 can adopt reporting mode 3 to reporting mode 5.
- the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray.
- the terminal device 110 can estimate the basis of different sub-arrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMIs of the multiple sub-arrays to the network device 120, and the network device 120 can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple sub-arrays and the PMIs of the multiple sub-arrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device 110 needs to process when estimating the basis of a sub-array is reduced, the number of loop nestings of distance and angle in the dictionary learning process is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device 110.
- the terminal device 110 determines the first spatial basis, it can perform the following steps.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the combination coefficient based on steps 1 and 2 described below.
- Step 1 The terminal device 110 performs space-frequency joint covariance matrix statistics on the downlink channel and performs inter-polarization averaging to obtain right Perform SVD or eigendecomposition to obtain the matrix of eigenvectors Pair Matrix Cut off and select the one with larger energy
- the corresponding eigenvalues The columns constitute the statistical feature matrix Contains most of the energy of the channel (P can be determined by the terminal device 110 itself, or the network device 120 specifies an optional range and the terminal device 110 selects P from the range).
- Step 2 The terminal device 110 uses the DFT codebook to construct a statistical feature matrix of the statistical feature vector Make an approximation, that is, find W f , W s and W 2 such that or Wherein, Wf and Ws are sub-matrices composed of some columns of the oversampled DFT matrix, Wf represents the frequency domain basis, Ws represents the spatial domain basis (such as the first spatial domain basis described above); W2 represents the combination coefficient matrix, which is The projection on the spatial compression matrix W 1 , therefore, the process of determining W 2 is to find a matrix that can correct W 1 to The process of the matrix.
- Step 1 and step 2 are examples rather than limitations, and the present application does not limit the method for determining the combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis.
- the terminal device 110 may perform the following steps.
- network device 120 receives the PMI.
- Each spatial basis in the spatial basis set has a corresponding identifier (also called an "index").
- the terminal device 110 can report the index of one or more selected spatial basis to the network device 120 through the PMI.
- the one or more spatial basis includes the first spatial basis.
- the index of the first spatial basis may include an identifier of an angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and an identifier of a distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
- the PMI also includes an oversampling rate of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis and an oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
- the elements in W2 are the combination coefficients corresponding to all spatial bases, and the terminal device 110 can select all or part of the combination coefficients to report to the network device 120.
- the terminal device 110 can report the non-zero coefficients and the strongest coefficients of all the combination coefficients to the network device 120 through the PMI, wherein the non-zero coefficients can be indicated by a bitmap, and the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, where L is the number of angle bases corresponding to all spatial bases in the spatial base set, D is the number of distance bases corresponding to all spatial bases in the spatial base set, and M is the number of all frequency domain bases.
- a bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis and frequency domain basis.
- the oversampling rate of the distance basis can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set.
- a larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the PMI also includes other information, such as the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, the index of the frequency domain basis, and the oversampling rate of the frequency domain basis, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the information included in the PMI.
- the network device 120 may perform the following steps.
- S540 Determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- S550 Determine a precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficients.
- the network device 120 determines one or more spatial basis from a spatial basis set based on the spatial basis index in the PMI, the one or more spatial basis includes a first spatial basis, and the one or more spatial basis constitutes a spatial compression matrix W 1 .
- the network device 120 determines one or more combination coefficients based on the PMI, and the one or more combination coefficients constitute a combination coefficient matrix W 2 .
- the network device 120 determines one or more frequency domain basis from a frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain basis index in the PMI, and the one or more frequency domain basis constitutes a frequency domain compression matrix W 3 .
- the network device 120 may determine the precoding matrix W according to W 1 , W 2 , W 3 and the near-field codebook structure shown in formula (3).
- the network device 120 has determined the spatial basis set before executing S540.
- the method for the network device 120 to determine the spatial basis set can refer to the method for the terminal device 110 to determine the spatial basis set, which will not be repeated here.
- each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the identifier and the combination system of the first spatial basis sent by the terminal device 110 The PMI of the number can match the spatial location determined by the network device 120 with the actual location of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
- the signaling interaction process of the terminal device 110 feeding back the PMI based on formula (1) and formula (2) is shown in FIG. 7 .
- the network device 120 sends parameters required for feedback of the PMI to the terminal device 110 .
- the parameters required for PMI feedback include, for example, r max , r min , ⁇ d, N 1 and N 2 .
- the parameters required for PMI feedback may also include other parameters, such as the horizontal spacing of the elements in the antenna array and the vertical spacing of the elements in the antenna array, which are not limited here.
- the terminal device 110 determines a spatial domain basis, a frequency domain basis and a combination coefficient according to the parameters required for feedback of the PMI.
- the method for determining the spatial domain basis and the combination coefficient according to r max , r min , ⁇ d, N 1 and N 2 is as described above, and the method for determining the frequency domain basis can refer to the relevant method in the prior art, which will not be described again here.
- the terminal device 110 sends the PMI to the network device 120 .
- the PMI includes the index of the spatial domain basis, the index of the frequency domain basis and the combination coefficient.
- the PMI may also include the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, and the oversampling rate of the frequency domain basis, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the information contained in the PMI.
- the network device 120 determines a precoding matrix according to the PMI.
- the method for determining the precoding matrix according to the PMI is as described in S550 and will not be repeated here.
- a signaling interaction process of the terminal device 110 feeding back PMI based on multiple sub-arrays is as shown in FIG8 .
- the network device 120 sends parameters required for feedback of the PMI to the terminal device 110 .
- the parameters required for feeding back the PMI include, for example, r max , r min , and the spacing of each subarray (eg, ⁇ ).
- the parameters required for feeding back the PMI may also include other parameters, for example, the number of transducers of each subarray, which is not limited here.
- the terminal device 110 determines a spatial domain basis, a frequency domain basis and a combination coefficient according to the parameters required for feedback of the PMI.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the spatial domain basis, the frequency domain basis and the combination coefficient according to the dictionary learning algorithm described above and the parameters required for feeding back the PMI.
- the terminal device 110 processes the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and ⁇ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray.
- the terminal device 110 sends the PMI to the network device 120 .
- the PMI includes the index of the spatial basis of one or more subarrays, the index of the frequency basis and the combination coefficient.
- the PMI may also include the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, and the oversampling rate of the frequency basis, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the information contained in the PMI.
- the network device 120 determines a precoding matrix according to the PMI.
- the method for determining the precoding matrix according to the PMI is as described in S550 and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 may determine whether the near-field channel model or the far-field channel model is applicable to the current scenario before executing the method 500.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the channel model applicable to the current scenario by the following two methods.
- Method 1 for determining a target channel model
- the first channel model is a near-field channel model
- the second channel model is a far-field channel model.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the TA of the first signal, and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
- TA is a parameter used to maintain uplink time synchronization.
- uplink time synchronization and downlink time synchronization are required. After the terminal device 110 is turned on, it will search for a cell and obtain downlink time synchronization through the primary synchronization signal and the secondary synchronization signal broadcast by the cell.
- Any uplink signal can be used as an input for the physical layer to perform uplink timing measurement.
- the uplink signal used by the physical layer for uplink timing measurement can be: random access (RA) preamble, SRS, DMRS and physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
- the physical layer When the terminal device 110 performs random access, the physical layer will obtain the uplink timing value based on the RA preamble code measurement, and report the measured TA to L2; the timing maintenance after the terminal device 110 successfully performs random access can be performed through SRS or PUCCH, and when there is uplink data transmission, DMRS can also be used to obtain the uplink timing measurement offset value.
- TA can reflect the distance between the network device 120 and the terminal device 110.
- the network device 120 may obtain the TA by measuring the first signal, and send the TA to the terminal device 110 through the first indication information.
- the first signal may be an SRS; or, when the multiple signals between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 include a random access preamble and a DMRS, the first signal may be a DMRS.
- the TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
- the network device 120 may also measure multiple signals to obtain multiple TAs, send the multiple TAs to the terminal device 110, and use one of the TAs in the first indication information.
- the terminal device 110 calculates d TA according to the TA indicated by the first indication information.
- the network device 120 may also calculate d TA and send d TA to the terminal device 110 .
- the network device 120 sends d FF to the terminal device 110.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF , or the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF .
- the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if
- the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if d TA /d FF > the fourth distance threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
- the terminal device 110 After the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device 120 of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device 120 can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
- the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF or according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and then the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model through fourth indication information.
- the terminal device 110 does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device 110 in determining the target channel model.
- the above describes the method for the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 to determine the target channel model.
- the signaling interaction process of the method in which the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model according to dTA is shown in FIG9 .
- the terminal device 110 sends a first signal to the network device 120.
- the first signal may be at least one of the random access preamble, SRS and DMRS mentioned above.
- the first signal may also be other uplink signals capable of measuring TA, such as PUCCH.
- the network device 120 measures TA through the first signal.
- the network device 120 sends a TA to the terminal device 110 .
- the network device 120 may send the priorities of the TAs of the multiple signals to the terminal device 110 when sending the TAs.
- the priority may also be a preset priority.
- the network device 120 may not send the priority, but directly instruct the terminal device 110 to use one of the TAs of the multiple signals, for example, by indicating the TA of the first signal through the first indication information, wherein the first indication information may be a 2-bit field; the first indication information of 00 may indicate the TA of the random access preamble, the first indication information of 01 may indicate the TA of the SRS, the first indication information of 10 may indicate the TA of the DMRS, and the first indication information of 11 may indicate the TA of the PUCCH.
- the terminal device 110 determines d TA according to the TA.
- the terminal device 110 may determine a TA according to the priority or the instruction of the network device 120 , and calculate d TA according to the TA.
- the network device 120 sends d FF and a distance threshold to the terminal device 110 .
- the distance threshold can be:
- a third distance threshold a third distance threshold
- a fourth distance threshold a third distance threshold
- the network device 120 may send only one of them; if the third distance threshold is equal to the fourth distance threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific message that carries the d FF and the distance threshold.
- S950 may be executed at any time before S960, for example, before S930, after S930, or simultaneously with S930, that is, the network device 120 sends TA, d FF , and distance threshold to the terminal device 110 through one message.
- the distance threshold may be preset, such as a value specified by a protocol, or a value configured by a manufacturer. In this case, the network device 120 no longer sends the distance threshold.
- the terminal device 110 determines a target channel model according to d TA , d FF and a distance threshold.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF and the first distance threshold and the second distance threshold.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold.
- the terminal device 110 can decide which distance thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
- the terminal device 110 indicates the target channel model to the network device 120 .
- the terminal device 110 can indicate the target channel model to the network device 120 through the third indication information, wherein the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- the signaling interaction flow of the method in which the network device 120 determines the target channel model according to dTA is shown in FIG10 .
- the terminal device 110 sends a first signal to the network device 120.
- the first signal may be at least one of the random access preamble, SRS and DMRS mentioned above.
- the first signal may also be other uplink signals capable of measuring TA, such as PUCCH.
- the network device 120 measures TA through the first signal.
- the network device 120 determines d TA according to the TA.
- the network device 120 may determine which signal's TA to use to determine d TA . For example, the network device 120 may determine the TA to use the SRS to determine d TA according to the priorities of the random access preamble, SRS, and DMRS.
- the network device 120 determines a target channel model according to d TA , d FF and a distance threshold.
- the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF and the first distance threshold and the second distance threshold.
- the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold.
- the network device 120 may decide by itself which distance thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
- the network device 120 indicates the target channel model to the terminal device 110 .
- the network device 120 can indicate the target channel model to the terminal device 110 through the fourth indication information, wherein the fourth indication information can be a 1-bit field; the fourth indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the fourth indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- the fourth indication information can be a 1-bit field; the fourth indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the fourth indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- tra cur is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of the current antenna array.
- the terminal device 110 can calculate the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units, and use the average value as tra cur to reduce the error of tra cur .
- the time unit is, for example, a transmission time interval (TTI) or a time slot.
- TTI transmission time interval
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the time unit.
- the terminal device 110 may also determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model.
- the network device 120 may calculate tra ref and inform the terminal device 110 of tra ref through the second indication information.
- tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for determining tra ref .
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref , or Alternatively, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of tra cur to tra ref .
- the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if
- the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if tra cur /tra ref ⁇ the fourth trace threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold, and the third trace threshold and the fourth trace threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
- the terminal device 110 After the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device 120 of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device 120 can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
- the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref or according to the ratio of tra cur to tra ref , and then the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model through the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device 110 does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device 110 in determining the target channel model.
- BWP bandwidth parts
- CA carrier aggregation
- the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model of BWP1, it can determine that the target channel model of BWP2 is the target channel model of BWP1; after the terminal device 110 informs the network device 120 of the target channel model of BWP1 through the third indication information, the network device 120 can determine that the target channel model of BWP2 is the target channel model of BWP1 according to the third indication information.
- the network device 120 determines the target channel model of frequency band 1, it can determine that the target channel model of frequency band 2 is the target channel model of frequency band 1; after the terminal device 110 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model of frequency band 1 through the fourth indication information, the terminal device 110 can determine that the target channel model of frequency band 2 is the target channel model of frequency band 1 according to the third indication information.
- frequency band 1 and frequency band 2 are frequency bands corresponding to two aggregated carriers, and the frequencies of frequency band 1 and frequency band 2 are similar.
- the signaling interaction process of the method in which the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model according to the tra cur is shown in FIG. 11 .
- the network device 120 sends tra ref and a trace threshold to the terminal device 110 .
- the trace threshold can be:
- the third trace threshold, and, the fourth trace threshold are the third trace threshold, and, the fourth trace threshold.
- the network device 120 may send only one of them; if the third trace threshold is equal to the fourth trace threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them.
- the tra ref and the trace threshold may be carried in one message or in multiple messages. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific message carrying the tra ref and the trace threshold.
- the network device 120 may inform the terminal device 110 of tra ref through the second indication information.
- the terminal device 110 determines tra cur .
- the terminal device 110 can calculate the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units, and use the average value as the tra cur to reduce the error of the tra cur .
- the time unit is, for example, TTI or time slot. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the time unit.
- the terminal device 110 determines a target channel model according to tra cur , tra ref and a trace threshold.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra cur , and the first trace threshold and the second trace threshold.
- the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of tra cur to tra cur and the third trace threshold and the fourth trace threshold.
- the terminal device 110 may decide which trace thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
- the terminal device 110 indicates the target channel model to the network device 120 .
- the terminal device 110 can indicate the target channel model to the network device 120 through the third indication information, wherein the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
- the corresponding device includes a hardware structure and/or software module corresponding to each function.
- the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the disclosed embodiments can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
- Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams of the structures of two possible communication devices provided in the embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device 110 or the network device 120 in the above method embodiments, and therefore also have the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiments of the present application, these communication devices can be the terminal device 110 shown in Figure 1, can be the network device 120 described in Figure 1, and can also be a model (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 110 or the network device 120.
- a model such as a chip
- the communication device 1200 includes a processing unit 1210 and a transceiver unit 1220.
- the transceiver unit 1220 performs a receiving step and/or a sending step under the control of the processing unit 1210, wherein the transceiver unit 1220 is a sending unit when performing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when performing the receiving step.
- the communication device 1200 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device 110 or the network device 120 in the method embodiments described in Figures 5, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11 above.
- the processing unit 1210 is used to: determine a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determine the combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis; the transceiver unit 1220 is used to: send PMI, the PMI includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a quantization bit number ⁇ d of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a distance gap d gap according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine first received data, second received data, r max , r min and ⁇ , wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and ⁇ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; process the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and ⁇ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray; wherein the first spatial domain basis includes: the angle basis of the first subarray, and, the distance basis of the first subarray; and/or, the angle basis of the second subarray, and, the distance basis
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a target channel model based on d TA , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a TA of the first signal; and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the TA of the first signal; and the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the TA of the first signal according to the first indication information.
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determine a target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than a fourth trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further configured to: receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate tra ref ; and the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine tra ref according to the second indication information.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is also used to: receive fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; the processing unit 1210 is also used to: determine the target channel model according to the fourth indication information; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
- the communication device 1200 may be a terminal device or a chip.
- the processing unit 1210 may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processing unit 1210 may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processing unit 1210 may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a storage unit.
- the storage unit may be integrated in the processing unit 1210 or located outside the processing unit 1210 and exists independently.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is used to: receive PMI, the PMI includes an identifier and a combination coefficient of a first spatial basis; the processing unit 1210 is used to: determine the first spatial basis from a spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determine the precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits ⁇ d of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a distance gap d gap according to r max , r min and ⁇ d; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
- the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, and the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; and determine the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray
- the basis, the angle basis of the second subarray, the distance basis of the second subarray, and the combining coefficients determine a precoding matrix.
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine the target channel model according to d TA , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a TA of the first signal; and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
- the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determine the target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
- the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than a fourth trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is also used to: receive third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; the processing unit 1210 is also used to: determine the target channel model according to the third indication information; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate TA, and TA is used to determine a target channel model.
- the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the trace tra ref of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model, tra ref is the average value of the traces of the spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices applying the second channel model, and tra ref is used to determine the target channel model.
- the communication device 1200 may be a network device or a chip.
- the processing unit 1210 may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processing unit 1210 may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processing unit 1210 may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a storage unit.
- the storage unit may be integrated in the processing unit 1210 or located outside the processing unit 1210 and exists independently.
- the communication device 1300 includes a processor 1310 and an interface circuit 1320.
- the processor 1310 and the interface circuit 1320 are coupled to each other.
- the interface circuit 1320 may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
- the communication device 1300 may further include a memory 1330 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1310 or storing input data required by the processor 1310 to execute instructions or storing data generated after the processor 1310 executes instructions.
- the processor 1310 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1210
- the interface circuit 1320 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1220 .
- the terminal chip When the communication device 1300 is a terminal chip (i.e., a chip applied to a terminal device), the terminal chip implements the functions of the terminal device 110 in the above method embodiment.
- the terminal chip receives information from the base station, which can be understood as the information is first received by other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the terminal chip by these modules.
- the terminal chip sends information to the base station, which can be understood as the information is first sent to other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the base station by these modules.
- the base station chip When the communication device 1300 is a base station chip (i.e., a chip applied to a base station), the base station chip implements the functions of the network device 120 in the above method embodiment.
- the base station chip receives information from the terminal, which can be understood as the information is first received by other modules in the base station (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the base station chip by these modules.
- the base station chip sends information to the terminal, which can be understood as the information is sent to other modules in the base station (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the terminal by these modules.
- Entities A and B can be RAN nodes or terminals, or modules inside the RAN nodes or terminals.
- the sending and receiving of information can be information interaction between a RAN node and a terminal, for example, information interaction between a base station and a terminal; the sending and receiving of information can also be information interaction between two RAN nodes, for example, information interaction between a CU and a DU; the sending and receiving of information can also be information interaction between different modules inside a device, for example, information interaction between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or information interaction between a base station chip and other modules in the base station.
- FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG14 only shows the main components of the terminal device 1400.
- the terminal device 1400 can be applied to the system shown in FIG1 to implement the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the terminal device 1400 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input-output device.
- the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to perform the actions described in the above method embodiment.
- the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
- the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of digital signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
- the control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- the input-output device is, for example, a touch screen, a display screen, a keyboard, etc., which is mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
- the processor can read the software program in the memory, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor processes the data to be sent and outputs a digital signal to the RF circuit.
- the RF circuit processes the digital signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
- the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the processor.
- the processor converts the digital signal into data and processes the data.
- FIG. 14 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in this application.
- the processor may include a baseband processor and/or a central processing unit.
- the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data
- the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor in Figure 14 may integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
- the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses.
- the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, the terminal device may include multiple central processing units to enhance its processing capabilities, and the various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
- the baseband processor may also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
- the central processing unit may also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
- the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built into the processor, or may be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
- the antenna and the control circuit having the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit 1401 of the terminal device 1400.
- the processor with processing function is regarded as the processor 1402 of the terminal device 1400.
- the terminal device 1400 includes a transceiver unit 1401 and a processor 1402.
- the transceiver unit 1401 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
- the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1401 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit 1401 may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1401 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
- the transceiver unit 1401 may not include an antenna, but only include a circuit part, so that the antenna is external to the transceiver unit.
- the processor 1402 can be used to execute the instructions stored in the memory to control the transceiver unit 1401 to receive signals and/or send signals, and complete the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the function of the transceiver unit 1401 can be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
- the processor 1402 controls the transceiver unit 1401 to implement the reception. Therefore, the processor 1402 is the signal transceiver decider and initiates the data transceiver operation, and the transceiver unit 1401 is the executor of the signal transceiver.
- Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 15 only shows the main components of the network device 1500.
- the network device 1500 can be applied to the system shown in Figure 1 to implement the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the network device 1500 may include one or more DU1510, and one or more CU1520.
- DU1510 may include at least one antenna 1511, at least one radio frequency unit 1512, at least one processor 1513 and at least one memory 1514.
- CU1520 can communicate with the core network, and CU1520 may include at least one processor 1522 and at least one memory 1521.
- DU1510 is mainly used for receiving and transmitting RF signals and converting RF signals to baseband signals, and completing some baseband processing functions.
- CU1520 may include at least one processor 1522 and at least one memory 1521.
- CU1520 and DU1510 may communicate through interfaces, wherein the control plane (CP) interface may be Fs-C, such as F1-C, and the user plane (UP) interface may be Fs-U, such as F1-U.
- CP control plane
- UP user plane
- CU1520 is the control center of the network device 1500, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
- CU1520 can be used to control the network device 1500 to execute the operation process of the network device in the above method embodiment.
- DU1510 and CU1520 can be physically set together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
- the baseband processing functions on DU1510 and CU1520 can be divided according to the protocol layers of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in CU1520, and the functions of the protocol layers below PDCP are set in DU1510.
- DU1510 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as a new radio (NR) network), or may respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as a long-term evolution (LTE) network and a NR network).
- the memory 1514 is used to store necessary instructions and data
- the processor 1513 is used to control the network device 1500 to perform necessary actions.
- the memory 1514 and the processor 1513 may serve one or more boards. In other words, a memory and a processor may be separately set on each board. A shared memory and a processor may also be set for multiple boards. In addition, necessary circuits may also be set on each board.
- CU1520 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as an NR network), or may respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as an LTE network and an NR network).
- the memory 1521 is used to store necessary instructions and data
- the processor 1522 is used to control the network device 1500 to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device 1500 to execute the operation flow of the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the memory 1521 and the processor 1522 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, a memory and a processor may be separately set on each single board. A shared memory and a processor may also be set for multiple single boards. In addition, necessary circuits may also be set on each single board.
- the network device 1500 shown in FIG15 can implement various processes related to the network device in the method embodiment.
- the operations and/or functions of each module in the network device 1500 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiment.
- the network device 1500 shown in FIG. 15 is only a possible architecture of the network device and does not constitute any limitation to the present application.
- the method provided in the present application may be applicable to network devices of other architectures.
- a network device including a CU, a DU, and an AAU or a network device including a BBU and an RRU.
- the present application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
- the processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
- the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
- the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or in software instructions that can be executed by a processor.
- the software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
- An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
- the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
- the processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC.
- the ASIC can be located in a base station or a terminal.
- the processor and the storage medium can also be present in a base station or a terminal as discrete components.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device or other programmable device.
- the computer program or instruction may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instruction may be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that integrates one or more available media.
- the available medium may be a magnetic medium, for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape; it may also be an optical medium, for example, a digital video disc; it may also be a semiconductor medium, for example, a solid-state hard disk.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or nonvolatile storage medium, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
- “at least one” means one or more, and “more than one” means two or more.
- “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist.
- a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in an “or” relationship; in the formula of the present application, the character “/” indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in a “division” relationship.
- “Including at least one of A, B and C” can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B and C.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Radio Transmission System (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2023年09月28日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202311290544.1、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on September 28, 2023, with application number 202311290544.1 and application name “Communication Method and Communication Device”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及通信领域,具体涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a communication method and a communication device.
在多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)技术中,网络设备可以通过预编码技术减小多个终端设备之间的干扰以及同一终端设备的多个信号流之间的干扰,从而提高信号质量,实现空分复用,提高频谱利用率。In multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) technology, network equipment can use precoding technology to reduce interference between multiple terminal devices and interference between multiple signal streams of the same terminal device, thereby improving signal quality, achieving space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
终端设备可以通过信道测量等方式确定与下行信道相适配的预编码矩阵,并通过预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)向网络设备反馈该预编码矩阵的相关信息,网络设备可以基于PMI从码本中确定与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵相同或相近的预编码矩阵。The terminal device can determine the precoding matrix that is compatible with the downlink channel through channel measurement and other methods, and feedback the relevant information of the precoding matrix to the network device through the precoding matrix indicator (PMI). The network device can determine a precoding matrix that is the same or similar to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device from the codebook based on the PMI.
随着大规模天线阵列的发展,网络设备的天线阵列的面积进一步增长,在载波频率不变的情况下,瑞利距离会随着天线阵列的面积增长呈指数型增长。随着瑞利距离的增加,终端设备更容易处于符合球面波规律的区域。由于球面波前的存在,不同天线振子的位置的信号相位发生畸变,使得传统码本的失配风险提高,例如,PMI提供的码本索引对应的空域位置与终端设备的实际位置不匹配,导致信道估计的准确度下降。With the development of large-scale antenna arrays, the area of antenna arrays of network devices has further increased. When the carrier frequency remains unchanged, the Rayleigh distance will increase exponentially with the area of the antenna array. As the Rayleigh distance increases, the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of spherical wavefronts, the signal phases at different antenna vibrator positions are distorted, which increases the mismatch risk of traditional codebooks. For example, the spatial position corresponding to the codebook index provided by the PMI does not match the actual position of the terminal device, resulting in a decrease in the accuracy of channel estimation.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法和通信装置,能够提高大规模天线阵列场景中码本的信道估计准确度。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and a communication device, which can improve the channel estimation accuracy of a codebook in a large-scale antenna array scenario.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或者应用于终端设备的芯片,下面以执行主体是终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括:确定第一空域基底,第一空域基底属于空域基底集合,空域基底集合包括多个空域基底,多个空域基底中的每一个空域基底由网络设备的天线阵列与第一物体之间的一条多径的角度和距离确定;根据第一空域基底确定组合系数;发送PMI,PMI包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数。In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the execution subject of the method can be a terminal device or a chip applied to the terminal device, and the following description is taken as an example that the execution subject is a terminal device. The method includes: determining a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determining a combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis; sending a PMI, the PMI includes an identifier of the first spatial basis and a combination coefficient.
随着瑞利距离的增加,终端设备更容易处于符合球面波规律的区域。由于球面波前的存在,不同天线振子的位置的信号相位发生畸变,因此,在进行预编码时需要考虑天线振子到散射体的距离,即,需要考虑多径的距离。在本实施例中,空域基底集合中每个空域基底同时考虑了多径的角度和距离,基于该空域基底集合设置的码本更加符合球面波规律。因此,终端设备发送的包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数的PMI,能够使网络设备确定的空域位置与终端设备的实际位置匹配,提高信道估计的准确度。As the Rayleigh distance increases, the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of the spherical wave front, the signal phase at the position of different antenna elements is distorted. Therefore, it is necessary to consider the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer when performing precoding, that is, it is necessary to consider the distance of the multipath. In this embodiment, each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the PMI sent by the terminal device, which includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient, can match the spatial position determined by the network device with the actual position of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,确定第一空域基底前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的量化比特数Δd;根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the communication method further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits Δd of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
空域基底集合是基于终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin确定的,终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离发生变化,空域基底集合也随之变化,因此,本实施例确定的空域基底集合与终端设备的实际位置更加适配。The spatial basis set is determined based on the maximum value r max and the minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. When the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array changes, the spatial basis set also changes accordingly. Therefore, the spatial basis set determined in this embodiment is more adapted to the actual position of the terminal device.
可选地,根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合,包括:根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍。Optionally, determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd includes: determining a distance interval d gap according to r max , r min and Δd; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
本实施例中,不同距离候选值之间的距离间隔dgap相同,终端设备接收Δd即可确定dgap,相比于接收多个dgap(或者,dgap与距离的关系),本实施例可以降低信令复杂度。 In this embodiment, the distance intervals d gap between different distance candidate values are the same, and the terminal device can determine d gap by receiving Δd. Compared with receiving multiple d gaps (or the relationship between d gap and distance), this embodiment can reduce signaling complexity.
可选地, Optionally,
可选地,确定第一空域基底前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中相邻两个距离候选值的差值为dgap,dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离存在关联关系;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the communication method further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , wherein the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
该关联关系例如是:dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离正相关。即,终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离越大,dgap越大;终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离越小,dgap越小。终端设备与天线阵列之间距离越远,距离的估计精度越低,考虑距离的分辨率,dgap与距离正相关可以降低信道估计的计算复杂度。The correlation relationship is, for example, that d gap is positively correlated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. That is, the greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the greater the d gap ; the smaller the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the smaller the d gap . The greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the lower the estimated accuracy of the distance. Considering the resolution of the distance, the positive correlation between d gap and the distance can reduce the computational complexity of channel estimation.
可选地,rmax和rmin是基于天线阵列与终端设备之间的信号的定时提前量(timing advance,TA)确定的。Optionally, r max and r min are determined based on a timing advance (TA) of a signal between the antenna array and the terminal device.
复用TA确定rmax和rmin,无需专门发送测距信号,可以节省信令开销。The multiplexing TA determines r max and r min , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
可选地,第一空域基底的标识包括:第一空域基底对应的角度基底的标识,和,第一空域基底对应的距离基底的标识;PMI还包括:非零系数的位图,位图的比特数为2*L*D*M,L为多个空域基底对应的角度基底的数量,D为多个空域基底对应的距离基底的数量,M为频域基底的数量;第一空域基底对应的距离基底的过采样率。Optionally, the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: the identifier of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and the identifier of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis; the PMI also includes: a bitmap of non-zero coefficients, the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, L is the number of angle basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, D is the number of distance basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, and M is the number of frequency domain basis; the oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
非零系数即不等于0的组合系数,比特数为2*L*D*M的位图能够适配包含角度基底、距离基底和频域基底的场景。距离基底的过采样率可用于扩展距离基底的数量,从而可以扩展空域基底集合中空域基底的数量,更大的空域基底集合有利于网络设备恢复出更接近终端设备确定的预编码矩阵的预编码矩阵,提高信道估计的准确度。A non-zero coefficient is a combination coefficient that is not equal to 0. A bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis, and frequency domain basis. The oversampling rate of the distance basis can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set. A larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,天线阵列包括第一子阵列和第二子阵列,确定第一空域基底,包括:确定第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmax、rmin和δ,其中,第一接收数据为来自第一子阵列的数据,第二接收数据为来自第二子阵列的数据,rmin为终端设备与天线阵列的距离的最大值,rmin为终端设备与天线阵列的距离的最小值,δ为第一子阵列与第二子阵列的间距;通过字典学习处理第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmin、rmin和δ,得到第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底;其中,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;和/或,第二子阵列的角度基底,和,第二子阵列的距离基底。Optionally, the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray, and determining a first spatial basis includes: determining first received data, second received data, r max , r min and δ, wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and δ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; processing the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and δ through dictionary learning to obtain an angle basis of the first subarray, a distance basis of the first subarray, an angle basis of the second subarray and a distance basis of the second subarray; wherein the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray.
由于本申请实施例的码本增加了距离维度,终端设备进行信道估计存在复杂度变高、反馈开销变大、以及功耗变高等问题。将天线阵列划分为多个子阵列后,终端设备可以分别估计不同子阵列的基底,最后将多个子阵列的PMI联合反馈,网络设备可以根据多个子阵列之间的几何关系以及多个子阵列的PMI重构信道。由于终端设备在估计一个子阵列的基底时需要处理的接收数据的数据量减少,字典学习过程进行距离和角度的循环嵌套的次数减小,从而降低了终端设备进行信道估计的复杂度和功耗。Since the codebook of the embodiment of the present application adds the distance dimension, the complexity of the channel estimation of the terminal device increases, the feedback overhead increases, and the power consumption increases. After the antenna array is divided into multiple subarrays, the terminal device can estimate the basis of different subarrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMI of multiple subarrays. The network device can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple subarrays and the PMI of the multiple subarrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device needs to process when estimating the basis of a subarray is reduced, the number of times the dictionary learning process performs loop nesting of distance and angle is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device.
可选地,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;组合系数为第一子阵列的组合系数,PMI还包括第一子阵列的频域基底的标识;或者,第一空域基底包括:第二子阵列的角度基底,和,第二子阵列的距离基底;组合系数为第二子阵列的组合系数,PMI还包括第二子阵列的频域基底的标识。Optionally, the first spatial domain basis includes: an angle basis of a first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; the combination coefficient is the combination coefficient of the first subarray, and the PMI also includes an identifier of the frequency domain basis of the first subarray; or, the first spatial domain basis includes: an angle basis of a second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray; the combination coefficient is the combination coefficient of the second subarray, and the PMI also includes an identifier of the frequency domain basis of the second subarray.
不同子阵列可以共用部分参数,例如,第一子阵列和第二子阵列可以共用频域基底和组合系统,第一子阵列和第二子阵列中,一个子阵列的空域基底也可以基于另一个子阵列的空域集合和两个子阵列的几何关系推导出来,因此,终端设备在发送PMI时,可以发送第一子阵列和第二子阵列中的一个子阵列的频域基底的标识、空域基底的标识和系数,从而可以降低反馈开销。Different subarrays can share some parameters. For example, the first subarray and the second subarray can share the frequency domain basis and the combined system. In the first subarray and the second subarray, the spatial domain basis of one subarray can also be derived based on the spatial domain set of the other subarray and the geometric relationship between the two subarrays. Therefore, when sending PMI, the terminal device can send the identifier of the frequency domain basis, the identifier of the spatial domain basis and the coefficient of one subarray in the first subarray and the second subarray, thereby reducing the feedback overhead.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA;根据dTA确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a target channel model based on d TA , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
不同的距离适用于不同的目标信道模型,基于终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离确定的目标信道模型能够匹配终端设备的实际位置,提高信道估计的准确度。Different distances are suitable for different target channel models. The target channel model determined based on the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据dTA确定目标信道模型,包括:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子 到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一距离阈值小于或等于第二距离阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model. distance to the first object; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, the target channel model is determined to be the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, the target channel model is determined to be the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于dTA与dFF的差值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据dTA确定目标信道模型,包括:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dFF与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dFF与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三距离阈值小于或等于第四距离阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model to the first object; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
若dTA与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若dTA与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于dTA与dFF的比值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than the third distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than the fourth distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of d TA to d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA,包括:确定第一信号的TA;根据第一信号的TA确定dTA。Optionally, determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array includes: determining a TA of the first signal; and determining d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
复用TA确定dTA,无需专门发送测距信号,可以节省信令开销。The multiplexing TA determines d TA , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
可选地,第一信号为多个信号中的一个;多个信号包括随机接入前导码、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)和解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS),第一信号为SRS;或者,多个信号包括随机接入前导码和DMRS,第一信号为DMRS。Optionally, the first signal is one of multiple signals; the multiple signals include a random access preamble, a sounding reference signal (SRS) and a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), and the first signal is SRS; or, the multiple signals include a random access preamble and DMRS, and the first signal is DMRS.
通过SRS测得的TA比通过DMRS或随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,通过DMRS测得的TA比通过随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,因此,基于上述优先级选择第一信号,可以获得更加精确的TA,从而使基于TA确定的目标信道模型更加精确。The TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
可选地,确定第一信号的TA之前,该通信方法还包括:接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示TA;确定第一信号的TA,包括:根据第一指示信息确定第一信号的TA。Optionally, before determining the TA of the first signal, the communication method also includes: receiving first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the TA; determining the TA of the first signal includes: determining the TA of the first signal according to the first indication information.
网络设备可以基于第一信号确定TA,并将TA告知终端设备,终端设备可以基于TA确定dTA,进而根据dTA确定目标信道模型,因此,本实施例可以将复用现有流程(终端设备获取TA的流程)确定目标信道模型,从而降低了确定目标信道模型的开销。The network device can determine TA based on the first signal and inform the terminal device of TA. The terminal device can determine d TA based on TA, and then determine the target channel model according to d TA . Therefore, this embodiment can reuse the existing process (the process of the terminal device obtaining TA) to determine the target channel model, thereby reducing the overhead of determining the target channel model.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹tracur;根据tracur确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the communication method further includes: determining the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determining a target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
tracur与目标信道模型之间存在关联关系,不同的tracur适用于不同的目标信道模型,基于tracur确定的目标信道模型能够匹配终端设备的实际位置,提高信道估计的准确度。There is a correlation between tra cur and the target channel model. Different tra cur are suitable for different target channel models. The target channel model determined based on tra cur can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据tracur确定目标信道模型,包括:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一迹阈值大于或等于第二迹阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于tracur与traref的差值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than the first trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are quite different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than the second trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between tra cur and tra ref, the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据tracur确定目标信道模型,包括:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与 traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三迹阈值大于或等于第四迹阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determining the target channel model to be the first channel model; if tra cur is The ratio of tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, and the target channel model is determined to be the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若tracur与traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于tracur与traref的比值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than the third trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device vary greatly, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device vary slightly and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of tra cur to tra ref , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,traref为预设值,或者,traref为应用第二信道模型的多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值。Optionally, tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied.
traref可以是网络设备预先配置的值、协议定义的值、经验值、或者通信网络建立时测量得到的值,通过预设traref的方式,终端设备从网络设备接收traref的频率降低,或者,终端设备无需从网络设备接收traref,从而减小了终端设备确定traref的功耗。通过多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值确定traref,可以减少traref的误差,基于该traref确定的目标信道模型更加准确。Tra Ref may be a value pre-configured by the network device, a value defined by the protocol, an empirical value, or a value measured when the communication network is established. By presetting Tra Ref , the frequency of receiving Tra Ref from the network device by the terminal device is reduced, or the terminal device does not need to receive Tra Ref from the network device, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining Tra Ref . By determining Tra Ref by the average value of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple terminal devices, the error of Tra Ref can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on Tra Ref is more accurate.
可选地,确定traref之前,该通信方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示traref;确定traref,包括:根据第二指示信息确定traref。Optionally, before determining tra ref , the communication method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate tra ref ; and determining tra ref includes: determining tra ref according to the second indication information.
本实施例中,终端设备可以通过第二指示信息获取最新的traref,最新的traref与当前的信道条件更加匹配,因此基于最新的traref确定的目标信道模型更加准确。In this embodiment, the terminal device may obtain the latest tra ref through the second indication information. The latest tra ref is more consistent with the current channel condition. Therefore, the target channel model determined based on the latest tra ref is more accurate.
可选地,tracur为多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值。Optionally, trace is the average of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units.
通过多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值确定tracur,可以减少tracur的误差,基于该tracur确定的目标信道模型更加准确。By determining tra cur by taking an average value of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of a plurality of time units, the error of tra cur can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on the tra cur is more accurate.
可选地,该通信方法还包括:发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示目标信道模型。Optionally, the communication method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
终端设备确定目标信道模型后,可以通过第三指示信息将目标信道模型告知网络设备,以便于网络设备基于目标信道模型重构更加准确的预编码矩阵。After the terminal device determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第四指示信息确定目标信道模型;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial domain basis, the communication method also includes: receiving fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the target channel model according to the fourth indication information; determining the first spatial domain basis, including: determining the first spatial domain basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
本实施例中,终端设备通过第四指示信息从网络设备获取目标信道模型,无需通过本地计算确定目标信道模型,从而降低了终端设备确定目标信道模型的功耗。In this embodiment, the terminal device obtains the target channel model from the network device through the fourth indication information, and there is no need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining the target channel model.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法的执行主体可以是网络设备或者应用于网络设备的芯片,下面以执行主体是网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括:接收PMI,PMI包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,空域基底集合包括多个空域基底,多个空域基底中的每一个空域基底由网络设备的天线阵列与第一物体之间的一条多径的角度和距离确定;根据第一空域基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the execution subject of the method can be a network device or a chip applied to the network device, and the following description is taken as an example that the execution subject is a network device. The method includes: receiving a PMI, the PMI includes an identifier and a combination coefficient of a first spatial basis; determining the first spatial basis from a spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determining a precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
随着瑞利距离的增加,终端设备更容易处于符合球面波规律的区域。由于球面波前的存在,不同位置的信号相位发生畸变,因此,在进行预编码时需要考虑天线振子到散射体的距离,即,需要考虑多径的距离。在本实施例中,空域基底集合中每个空域基底同时考虑了多径的角度和距离,基于该空域基底集合设置的码本更加符合球面波规律。因此,终端设备发送的包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数的PMI,能够使网络设备确定的空域位置与终端设备的实际位置匹配,提高信道估计的准确度。As the Rayleigh distance increases, the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of the spherical wavefront, the signal phase at different positions is distorted. Therefore, the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer needs to be considered when performing precoding, that is, the multipath distance needs to be considered. In this embodiment, each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the PMI sent by the terminal device, which includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient, can match the spatial position determined by the network device with the actual position of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的量化比特数Δd;根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method further includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits Δd of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
空域基底集合是基于终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin确定的,终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离发生变化,空域基底集合也随之变化,因此,本实施例确定的空域基底集合与终端设备的实际位置更加适配。The spatial basis set is determined based on the maximum value r max and the minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array. When the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array changes, the spatial basis set also changes accordingly. Therefore, the spatial basis set determined in this embodiment is more adapted to the actual position of the terminal device.
可选地,根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合,包括:根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离间隔 dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍。Optionally, determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd includes: determining a distance interval according to r max , r min and Δd d gap ; determine the distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
可选地, Optionally,
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中相邻两个距离候选值的差值为dgap,dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离存在关联关系;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determining a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining an angle candidate value set; and determining a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
该关联关系例如是:dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离正相关。即,终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离越大,dgap越大;终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离越小,dgap越小。The correlation relationship is, for example, that d gap is positively correlated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, that is, the greater the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the greater the d gap ; and the smaller the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, the smaller the d gap .
可选地,rmax和rmin是基于天线阵列与终端设备之间的信号的TA确定的。Optionally, r max and r min are determined based on the TA of the signal between the antenna array and the terminal device.
复用TA确定rmax和rmin,无需专门发送测距信号,可以节省信令开销。The multiplexing TA determines r max and r min , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
可选地,第一空域基底的标识包括:第一空域基底对应的角度基底的标识,和,第一空域基底对应的距离基底的标识;PMI还包括:非零系数的位图,位图的比特数为2*L*D*M,L为多个空域基底对应的角度基底的数量,D为多个空域基底对应的距离基底的数量,M为频域基底的数量;第一空域基底对应的距离基底的过采样率。Optionally, the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: the identifier of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and the identifier of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis; the PMI also includes: a bitmap of non-zero coefficients, the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, L is the number of angle basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, D is the number of distance basis corresponding to multiple spatial basis, and M is the number of frequency domain basis; the oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
非零系数即不等于0的组合系数,比特数为2*L*D*M的位图能够适配包含角度基底、距离基底和频域基底的场景。过采样率可用于扩展距离基底的数量,从而可以扩展空域基底集合中空域基底的数量,更大的空域基底集合有利于网络设备恢复出更接近终端设备确定的预编码矩阵的预编码矩阵,提高信道估计的准确度。A non-zero coefficient is a combination coefficient that is not equal to 0. A bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis, and frequency domain basis. The oversampling rate can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set. A larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,天线阵列包括第一子阵列和第二子阵列,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;和/或,第二子阵列的角度基底,和,第二子阵列的距离基底。Optionally, the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray, and the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray.
不同子阵列可以共用部分参数,例如,第一子阵列和第二子阵列可以共用频域基底和组合系统,第一子阵列和第二子阵列中,一个子阵列的空域基底也可以基于另一个子阵列的空域集合和两个子阵列的几何关系推导出来,因此,终端设备在发送PMI时,可以发送第一子阵列和第二子阵列中的一个子阵列的频域基底的标识、空域基底的标识和系数,从而可以降低反馈开销。Different subarrays can share some parameters. For example, the first subarray and the second subarray can share the frequency domain basis and the combined system. In the first subarray and the second subarray, the spatial domain basis of one subarray can also be derived based on the spatial domain set of the other subarray and the geometric relationship between the two subarrays. Therefore, when sending PMI, the terminal device can send the identifier of the frequency domain basis, the identifier of the spatial domain basis and the coefficient of one subarray in the first subarray and the second subarray, thereby reducing the feedback overhead.
可选地,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;根据第一空域基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵,包括:根据第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、和第一子阵列与第二子阵列的间距,确定第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底;根据第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、第二子阵列的角度基底、第二子阵列的距离基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵。Optionally, the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; determining the precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient includes: determining the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, and the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; determining the precoding matrix according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray, the distance basis of the second subarray and the combination coefficient.
由于本申请实施例的码本增加了距离维度,终端设备进行信道估计存在复杂度变高、反馈开销变大、以及功耗变高等问题。将天线阵列划分为多个子阵列后,终端设备可以分别估计不同子阵列的基底,最后将多个子阵列的PMI联合反馈,网络设备可以根据多个子阵列之间的几何关系以及多个子阵列的PMI重构信道。由于终端设备在估计一个子阵列的基底时需要处理的接收数据的数据量减少,字典学习过程进行距离和角度的循环嵌套的次数减小,从而降低了终端设备进行信道估计的复杂度和功耗。Since the codebook of the embodiment of the present application adds the distance dimension, the complexity of the channel estimation of the terminal device increases, the feedback overhead increases, and the power consumption increases. After the antenna array is divided into multiple subarrays, the terminal device can estimate the basis of different subarrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMI of multiple subarrays. The network device can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple subarrays and the PMI of the multiple subarrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device needs to process when estimating the basis of a subarray is reduced, the number of times the dictionary learning process performs loop nesting of distance and angle is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA;根据dTA确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determining the target channel model according to d TA , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
不同的距离适用于不同的目标信道模型,基于终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离确定的目标信道模型能够匹配终端设备的实际位置,提高信道估计的准确度。Different distances are suitable for different target channel models. The target channel model determined based on the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据dTA确定目标信道模型,包括:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一距 离阈值小于或等于第二距离阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determining the target channel model to be the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determining the target channel model to be the second channel model; wherein the first distance The distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于dTA与dFF的差值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than the first distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than the second distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据dTA确定目标信道模型,包括:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三距离阈值小于或等于第四距离阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to d TA includes: determining d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array in the second channel model to the first object; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
若dTA与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若dTA与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于dTA与dFF的比值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than the third distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than the fourth distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various vibrators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the ratio of d TA to d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA,包括:确定第一信号的TA;根据第一信号的TA确定dTA。Optionally, determining the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array includes: determining a TA of the first signal; and determining d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
复用TA确定dTA,无需专门发送测距信号,可以节省信令开销。The multiplexing TA determines d TA , and there is no need to send a special ranging signal, which can save signaling overhead.
可选地,第一信号为多个信号中的一个;多个信号包括随机接入前导码、SRS和DMRS,第一信号为SRS;或者,多个信号包括随机接入前导码和DMRS,第一信号为DMRS。Optionally, the first signal is one of multiple signals; the multiple signals include a random access preamble, an SRS and a DMRS, and the first signal is the SRS; or, the multiple signals include a random access preamble and a DMRS, and the first signal is the DMRS.
通过SRS测得的TA比通过DMRS或随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,通过DMRS测得的TA比通过随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,因此,基于上述优先级选择第一信号,可以获得更加精确的TA,从而使基于TA确定的目标信道模型更加精确。The TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:确定天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹tracur;根据tracur确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: determining the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determining the target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis includes: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
tracur与目标信道模型之间存在关联关系,不同的tracur适用于不同的目标信道模型,基于tracur确定的目标信道模型能够匹配终端设备的实际位置,提高信道估计的准确度。There is a correlation between tra cur and the target channel model. Different tra cur are suitable for different target channel models. The target channel model determined based on tra cur can match the actual position of the terminal device and improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据tracur确定目标信道模型,包括:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一迹阈值大于或等于第二迹阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , tra ref being the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于dTA与dFF的差值可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than the first trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are quite different, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than the second trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, the distances between the various oscillators in the antenna array and the terminal device are relatively different and can be considered equal, and the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. Based on the difference between d TA and d FF , the currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined to improve the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,根据tracur确定目标信道模型,包括:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三迹阈值大于或等于第四迹阈值。Optionally, determining the target channel model according to tra cur includes: determining tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than a fourth trace threshold, determining that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较近,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较大,终端设备的实际位置与第一信道模型更匹配。若tracur与traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,说明终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离较远,天线阵列中的各个振子到终端设备的距离差异较小,可以视为相等,终端设备的实际位置与第二信道模型更匹配。基于tracur与traref的比值 可以准确确定当前适用的信道模型,提高信道估计的准确度。If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than the third trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively close, and the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the terminal device vary greatly, so the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the first channel model. If the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than the fourth trace threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array is relatively far, and the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the terminal device vary slightly and can be considered equal, so the actual position of the terminal device is more consistent with the second channel model. The currently applicable channel model can be accurately determined, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,tracur为多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值。Optionally, trace is the average of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units.
通过多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值确定tracur,可以减少tracur的误差,基于该tracur确定的目标信道模型更加准确。By determining tra cur by taking an average value of the traces of the spatial correlation matrix of a plurality of time units, the error of tra cur can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on the tra cur is more accurate.
可选地,traref为预设值,或者,traref为应用第二信道模型的多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值。Optionally, tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied.
traref可以是协议定义的值、协议定义的值、经验值、或者通信网络建立时测量得到的值,通过预设traref的方式,网络设备无需再计算traref,从而减小了网络设备确定traref的功耗。通过多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值确定traref,可以减少traref的误差,基于该traref确定的目标信道模型更加准确。Tra Ref can be a value defined by a protocol, a value defined by a protocol, an empirical value, or a value measured when a communication network is established. By presetting Tra Ref , the network device does not need to calculate Tra Ref , thereby reducing the power consumption of the network device in determining Tra Ref . By determining Tra Ref by the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple terminal devices, the error of Tra Ref can be reduced, and the target channel model determined based on Tra Ref is more accurate.
可选地,该通信方法还包括:发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示目标信道模型。Optionally, the communication method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
网络设备确定目标信道模型后,通过第四指示信息向终端设备指示该目标信道模型,终端设备无需通过本地计算确定目标信道模型,从而降低了终端设备确定目标信道模型的功耗。After the network device determines the target channel model, it indicates the target channel model to the terminal device through the fourth indication information. The terminal device does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device in determining the target channel model.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,该通信方法还包括:接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第三指示信息确定目标信道模型;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the communication method also includes: receiving third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the target channel model according to the third indication information; determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
终端设备确定目标信道模型后,可以通过第三指示信息将目标信道模型告知网络设备,以便于网络设备基于目标信道模型重构更加准确的预编码矩阵。After the terminal device determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
可选地,接收第三指示信息之前,该通信方法还包括:发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示TA,TA用于确定目标信道模型。Optionally, before receiving the third indication information, the communication method further includes: sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate TA, and TA is used to determine a target channel model.
网络设备可以基于第一信号确定TA,并将TA告知终端设备,终端设备可以基于TA确定dTA,进而根据dTA确定目标信道模型,因此,本实施例可以将复用现有流程(终端设备获取TA的流程)确定目标信道模型,从而降低了确定目标信道模型的开销。The network device can determine TA based on the first signal and inform the terminal device of TA. The terminal device can determine d TA based on TA, and then determine the target channel model according to d TA . Therefore, this embodiment can reuse the existing process (the process of the terminal device obtaining TA) to determine the target channel model, thereby reducing the overhead of determining the target channel model.
可选地,接收第三指示信息之前,该通信方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹traref,traref为应用第二信道模型的多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值,traref用于确定目标信道模型。Optionally, before receiving the third indication information, the communication method also includes: sending second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the trace tra ref of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model, tra ref is the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple terminal devices applying the second channel model, and tra ref is used to determine the target channel model.
本实施例中,终端设备可以通过第二指示信息获取最新的traref,最新的traref与当前的信道条件更加匹配,因此基于最新的traref确定的目标信道模型更加准确。In this embodiment, the terminal device may obtain the latest tra ref through the second indication information. The latest tra ref is more consistent with the current channel condition. Therefore, the target channel model determined based on the latest tra ref is more accurate.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元,用于执行:上述第一方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。其中,该收发单元在执行发送步骤时为发送单元,该收发单元在执行接收步骤时为接收单元。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device. The communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiver unit, configured to execute: any one of the methods in the first aspect and its optional embodiments described above. The transceiver unit is a sending unit when executing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when executing the receiving step.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元,用于执行:上述第二方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。其中,该收发单元在执行发送步骤时为发送单元,该收发单元在执行接收步骤时为接收单元。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device. The communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiver unit, configured to execute: any method in the second aspect and its optional implementations described above. The transceiver unit is a sending unit when executing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when executing the receiving step.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备的芯片。该通信装置可以包括处理器,用于执行:上述第一方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a chip applied to a terminal device. The communication device may include a processor, configured to execute: any method in the above first aspect and its optional implementation manner.
可选地,当该通信装置为终端设备时,该处理器例如是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)或者中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU);当该通信装置为芯片时,该处理器例如是核(core),该核可以包括至少一种执行单元(execution unit),该执行单元例如是算术逻辑单元(arithmetic and logic unit,ALU)。Optionally, when the communication device is a terminal device, the processor is, for example, a system on chip (SoC) or a central processor unit (CPU); when the communication device is a chip, the processor is, for example, a core, which may include at least one execution unit (execution unit), such as an arithmetic and logic unit (ALU).
可选地,该通信装置还可以包括收发器。当该通信装置为终端设备时,该收发器可以是收发电路、天线等;当该通信装置是应用于终端设备的芯片时,该收发器可以是输入/输出接口、管脚、电路等。Optionally, the communication device may further include a transceiver. When the communication device is a terminal device, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an antenna, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the transceiver may be an input/output interface, a pin, a circuit, etc.
可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,该处理器执行该存储器所存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行上述第一方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一 种方法。当该通信装置为终端设备时,该存储器可以是只读存储器、随机存取存储器等;当该通信装置是应用于终端设备的芯片时,该存储器可以是寄存器、缓存等。Optionally, the communication device may further include a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor executing the computer program or instruction stored in the memory so that the communication device performs any one of the above-mentioned first aspect and its optional implementation modes. When the communication device is a terminal device, the memory may be a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the memory may be a register, a cache, etc.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是应用于网络设备的芯片。该通信装置可以包括处理器,用于执行:上述第二方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device or a chip applied to a network device. The communication device may include a processor, configured to execute: any method in the second aspect and its optional implementation manners described above.
可选地,当该通信装置为网络设备时,该处理器例如是CPU、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)或者现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA);当该通信装置为芯片时,该处理器例如是核,该核可以包括至少一种执行单元,该执行单元例如是ALU。Optionally, when the communication device is a network device, the processor is, for example, a CPU, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a field programmable gate array (FPGA); when the communication device is a chip, the processor is, for example, a core, which may include at least one execution unit, such as an ALU.
可选地,该通信装置还可以包括收发器。当该通信装置为网络设备时,该收发器可以是收发电路、天线等;当该通信装置是应用于网络设备的芯片时,该收发器可以是输入/输出接口、管脚、电路等。Optionally, the communication device may further include a transceiver. When the communication device is a network device, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, an antenna, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the transceiver may be an input/output interface, a pin, a circuit, etc.
可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,该处理器执行该存储器所存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行上述第二方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。当该通信装置为网络设备时,该存储器可以是只读存储器、随机存取存储器等;当该通信装置是应用于网络设备的芯片时,该存储器可以是寄存器、缓存等。Optionally, the communication device may further include a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor executing the computer program or instruction stored in the memory so that the communication device performs any one of the methods in the above-mentioned second aspect and its optional implementations. When the communication device is a network device, the memory may be a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.; when the communication device is a chip applied to a network device, the memory may be a register, a cache, etc.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当该计算机程序在计算机上被执行时,使得该计算机执行第一方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed on a computer, the computer executes any method in the first aspect and its optional embodiments.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当该计算机程序在计算机上被执行时,使得该计算机执行第二方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed on a computer, the computer executes any method in the second aspect and its optional implementation methods.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码或计算机程序指令,当该计算机程序代码或计算机程序指令被通信装置运行时,使得该通信装置执行第一方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In the ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction. When the computer program code or the computer program instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device executes any one of the methods in the first aspect and its optional embodiments.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码或计算机程序指令,当该计算机程序代码或计算机程序指令被通信装置运行时,使得该通信装置执行第二方面及其可选的实施方式中的任一种方法。In the tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code or a computer program instruction. When the computer program code or the computer program instruction is executed by a communication device, the communication device executes any one of the methods in the second aspect and its optional embodiments.
图1是一种适用于本申请的通信系统的示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the present application;
图2是一种适用于本申请的协议栈的示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack applicable to the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种远场信道模型的示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a far-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种近场信道模型的示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a near-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种几何关系的示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a geometric relationship provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种反馈PMI的信令交互流程图;FIG7 is a signaling interaction flow chart of a feedback PMI provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的另一种反馈PMI的信令交互流程图;FIG8 is a flowchart of another signaling interaction for feeding back PMI provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种确定目标信道模型的信令交互流程图;9 is a signaling interaction flow chart for determining a target channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的另一种确定目标信道模型的信令交互流程图;10 is another signaling interaction flow chart for determining a target channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例提供的再一种确定目标信道模型的信令交互流程图;11 is a flowchart of signaling interaction for determining a target channel model according to another embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图;FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的示意图;FIG13 is a schematic diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的示意图;FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的示意图。FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
图1是一种适用于本申请的通信系统的示意图。该通信系统包括终端设备110和网络设备120,下面分别对该通信系统的各个部分进行说明。 Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the present application. The communication system includes a terminal device 110 and a network device 120. The following describes each part of the communication system.
Ⅰ、终端设备110。Ⅰ. Terminal device 110.
本申请实施例中,终端设备110可以是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。终端设备110也可称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备或用户装置。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device 110 may be a device that provides voice and/or data to a user, for example, a handheld device or a vehicle-mounted device with a wireless connection function. The terminal device 110 may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), a terminal, an access station, a UE station, a remote station, a wireless communication device, or a user device.
例如,终端设备110可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、整车、整车中的无线通信模块、车载盒子(telematics box,T-box)、路侧单元(road site unit,RSU)、无人驾驶中的无线终端、物联网(internet of things,IoT)中智能音箱、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备,本申请实施例对终端设备110所采用的具体技术和具体形态不做限定。For example, the terminal device 110 can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a whole vehicle, a wireless communication module in the whole vehicle, a telematics box (T-box), a road side unit (RSU), a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a smart speaker in the Internet of Things (IoT), a wireless terminal device in remote medical, a wireless terminal device in a smart grid, a wireless terminal device in transportation safety, a wireless terminal device in a smart city, or a wireless terminal device in a smart home. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific form adopted by the terminal device 110.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,终端设备110还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能的电子设备,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜,或者只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用的电子设备,如各类进行体征测量的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example but not limitation, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device 110 may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed using wearable technology for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, wearable smart devices include electronic devices that are fully functional, large in size, and can achieve full or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, or electronic devices that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for measuring vital signs.
终端设备110还可以是车辆与万物通信(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)设备,例如,智能汽车(smart car或intelligent car)、数字汽车(digital car)、无人汽车(unmanned car、driverless car、pilotless car或automobile)、自动汽车(self-driving car或autonomous car)、纯电动汽车(pure EV或Battery EV)、混合动力汽车(hybrid electric vehicle,HEV)、增程式电动汽车(range extended EV,REEV)、插电式混合动力汽车(plug-in HEV,PHEV)或新能源汽车(new energy vehicle)。如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。The terminal device 110 may also be a vehicle-to-everything (V2X) device, such as a smart car (or intelligent car), a digital car, an unmanned car (or driverless car, or pilotless car, or automobile), a self-driving car (or autonomous car), a pure electric vehicle (or battery EV), a hybrid electric vehicle (or HEV), a range extended EV (or REEV), a plug-in hybrid electric vehicle (or PHEV), or a new energy vehicle (or new energy vehicle). The various terminal devices described above, if located on a vehicle (e.g., placed in or installed in a vehicle), can be considered as vehicle-mounted terminal devices, which are also referred to as on-board units (or OBUs).
本申请的终端设备110还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元,车辆通过内置的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请的方法。The terminal device 110 of the present application may also be a vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units. The vehicle may implement the method of the present application through the built-in vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip or vehicle-mounted unit.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备110还可以是未来演进的公共陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的设备,例如,终端设备110可以是第六代移动通信(6th generation mobile communication technology,6G)系统中的终端设备。本申请实施例对终端设备110的具体类型不做限定。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device 110 may also be a device in a future-evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), for example, the terminal device 110 may be a terminal device in a sixth generation mobile communication technology (6G) system. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the terminal device 110.
Ⅱ、网络设备120。Ⅱ. Network equipment 120.
网络设备120是一种为终端设备提供无线通信功能的设备,负责空中接口(简称为“空口”)相关的功能。The network device 120 is a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminal devices and is responsible for functions related to the air interface (abbreviated as "air interface").
网络设备120又可以称为网络装置或无线接入网络(radio access network,RAN)设备,网络设备120包括但不限于:基站(base station,BS)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation nodeB,gNB)、6G移动通信系统中的下一代基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统、远距离无线电(long range radio,LoRa)系统或车联网系统中的接入节点。The network equipment 120 can also be called a network device or a radio access network (RAN) device. The network equipment 120 includes but is not limited to: a base station (BS), an evolved base station (eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next generation base station (next generation nodeB, gNB) in the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system, a next generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) system, a long range radio (LoRa) system or an access node in a vehicle networking system.
RAN设备可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),也可以是分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),还可以是无线单元(radio unit,RU)。这里的CU完成基站的无线资源控制协议和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的功能,还可以完成业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)的功能;DU完成基站的无线链路控制层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层的功能,还可以完成部分物理层或全部物理层的功能,有关上述各个协议层的具体描述,可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)的相关技术规范。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元 (remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。The RAN device can be a module or unit that completes part of the functions of the base station, for example, it can be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), or a radio unit (RU). The CU here completes the functions of the radio resource control protocol and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also complete the function of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); the DU completes the functions of the radio link control layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer of the base station, and can also complete the functions of part of the physical layer or all of the physical layer. For the specific description of the above-mentioned protocol layers, please refer to the relevant technical specifications of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP). The CU and DU can be set separately, or they can be included in the same network element, such as the baseband unit (BBU). The RU can be included in the radio frequency device or radio frequency unit, for example, in the radio remote unit The antenna is located in a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU) or a remote radio head (RRH).
在不同系统中,CU、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在开放无线接入网(open radio access network,ORAN)系统中,CU也可以称为开放式CU(open CU,O-CU),DU也可以称为开放式DU(open DU,O-DU),RU也可以称为开放式RU(open RU,O-RU)。本申请中的CU、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU, DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, in an open radio access network (ORAN) system, CU may also be called an open CU (open CU, O-CU), DU may also be called an open DU (open DU, O-DU), and RU may also be called an open RU (open RU, O-RU). Any unit in the CU, DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
RAN设备可以是宏基站,也可以是微基站、室内站、中继节点或施主节点等。RAN设备还可以是小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)或者毫微微小区(femto cell)。本申请的实施例中的网络设备120可以为上述中的任一设备或设备中的装置,且本申请实施例对网络设备120所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为了便于描述,RAN设备可以作为网络设备120的简称,基站作为RAN设备的一个示例。The RAN device may be a macro base station, a micro base station, an indoor station, a relay node or a donor node, etc. The RAN device may also be a base station corresponding to a small cell, where the small cell may include: a metro cell, a micro cell, a pico cell or a femto cell. The network device 120 in the embodiment of the present application may be any of the above devices or devices in the device, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the network device 120. For the convenience of description, the RAN device may be used as an abbreviation for the network device 120, and the base station is used as an example of the RAN device.
基站和终端可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。基站和终端可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对基站和终端的应用场景不做限定。Base stations and terminals can be fixed or movable. Base stations and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on the water surface; they can also be deployed on airplanes, balloons, and artificial satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of base stations and terminals.
基站和终端的角色可以是相对的,例如,无人机(或,直升机)可以被配置成移动基站,对于那些通过无人机接入到网络设备120的终端来说,无人机是基站;但对于网络设备120来说,无人机是终端,即网络设备120与无人机之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,网络设备120与无人机之间也可以是通过基站与基站之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于网络设备120来说,无人机也是基站。因此,基站和终端都可以统一称为通信装置,图1中的网络设备120可以称为具有基站功能的通信装置,图1中的终端设备110可以称为具有终端功能的通信装置。The roles of the base station and the terminal can be relative. For example, a drone (or a helicopter) can be configured as a mobile base station. For those terminals that access the network device 120 through the drone, the drone is a base station; but for the network device 120, the drone is a terminal, that is, the network device 120 and the drone communicate through the wireless air interface protocol. Of course, the network device 120 and the drone can also communicate through the interface protocol between base stations. In this case, relative to the network device 120, the drone is also a base station. Therefore, both the base station and the terminal can be collectively referred to as a communication device. The network device 120 in Figure 1 can be referred to as a communication device with a base station function, and the terminal device 110 in Figure 1 can be referred to as a communication device with a terminal function.
基站和终端之间、基站和基站之间、终端和终端之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信;可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Base stations and terminals, base stations and base stations, and terminals and terminals can communicate through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both; they can communicate through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
在本申请的实施例中,基站的功能也可以由基站中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有基站功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有基站功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端的功能也可以由终端中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端功能的装置来执行。In the embodiments of the present application, the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function. The control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the above-mentioned application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, and smart city. The functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.
在本申请中,基站向终端发送下行信号或下行信息,下行信息承载在下行信道上;终端向基站发送上行信号或上行信息,上行信息承载在上行信道上。终端为了与基站进行通信,需要在基站控制的小区上建立无线连接。与终端建立了无线连接的小区称为该终端的服务小区。当终端与该服务小区进行通信的时候,还会受到来自邻区的信号的干扰。In this application, the base station sends a downlink signal or downlink information to the terminal, and the downlink information is carried on the downlink channel; the terminal sends an uplink signal or uplink information to the base station, and the uplink information is carried on the uplink channel. In order to communicate with the base station, the terminal needs to establish a wireless connection on the cell controlled by the base station. The cell with which the terminal has established a wireless connection is called the service cell of the terminal. When the terminal communicates with the service cell, it will also be interfered by signals from neighboring cells.
下面介绍适用于本申请的协议栈。The following describes a protocol stack applicable to this application.
终端设备110与网络设备120的协议栈如图2所示。该协议栈主要是接入层的协议栈,其中,接入层又可以分为无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、PDCP层,无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、MAC层和物理(physical,PHY)层。The protocol stack of the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is shown in Figure 2. The protocol stack is mainly the protocol stack of the access layer, wherein the access layer can be divided into a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a PDCP layer, a radio link control (RLC) layer, a MAC layer and a physical (PHY) layer.
下面以上行传输为例对协议栈的工作流程进行说明。The following describes the workflow of the protocol stack using uplink transmission as an example.
(1)RRC层的主要功能包括系统消息、准入控制、安全管理、测量与上报、以及切换和移动性,与这些功能相关的控制面数据在非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)产生。RRC层还负责NAS协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)传输的无线资源管理。NAS PDU到达RRC层后,被作为RRC服务数据单元(service data unit,SDU)处理,生成RRC PDU。RRC层生成的控制面数据(如RRC重配置消息)也会被打包为RRC PDU。(1) The main functions of the RRC layer include system messages, admission control, security management, measurement and reporting, as well as switching and mobility. The control plane data related to these functions is generated in the non-access stratum (NAS). The RRC layer is also responsible for the radio resource management of the transmission of NAS protocol data units (PDUs). After the NAS PDU reaches the RRC layer, it is processed as an RRC service data unit (SDU) to generate an RRC PDU. The control plane data generated by the RRC layer (such as RRC reconfiguration messages) will also be packaged into RRC PDUs.
(2)PDCP层的主要功能包括传输用户面和控制面数据、维护PDCP序列号、路由和重复、加密/解密和完整性保护、重排序、支持乱序递交、以及重复丢弃。RRC PDU到达PDCP层后,被作为PDCP SDU处理,生成PDCP PDU。(2) The main functions of the PDCP layer include transmitting user plane and control plane data, maintaining PDCP sequence numbers, routing and repetition, encryption/decryption and integrity protection, reordering, supporting out-of-order delivery, and duplicate discard. After the RRC PDU reaches the PDCP layer, it is processed as a PDCP SDU to generate a PDCP PDU.
(3)RLC层的主要功能包括检错纠错、分段重组、重分段以及重复包检测。PDCP PDU到达RLC层后,被作为RLC SDU处理,生成RLC PDU。 (3) The main functions of the RLC layer include error detection and correction, segmentation and reassembly, resegmentation, and duplicate packet detection. After the PDCP PDU reaches the RLC layer, it is processed as an RLC SDU to generate an RLC PDU.
(4)MAC层的主要功能包括逻辑信道和传输信道之间的映射、复用/解复用、调度、混合自动重传(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)、以及逻辑信道优先级设置。RLC PDU到达MAC层后,被作为MAC SDU处理,生成MAC子PDU(subPDU),多个MAC子PDU级联生成MAC PDU。(4) The main functions of the MAC layer include mapping between logical channels and transport channels, multiplexing/demultiplexing, scheduling, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), and logical channel priority setting. After the RLC PDU reaches the MAC layer, it is processed as a MAC SDU to generate a MAC subPDU. Multiple MAC subPDUs are cascaded to generate a MAC PDU.
(5)PHY层的主要功能包括编码、调制和多输入多输出(multiple-input multiple-output,MIMO)。MAC PDU到达PHY层后,在对应的时频资源上被发送出去。(5) The main functions of the PHY layer include coding, modulation, and multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO). After the MAC PDU reaches the PHY layer, it is sent out on the corresponding time-frequency resources.
由上可知,相同协议层之间传递的数据可以称为SDU,相邻协议层之间传递的数据可以称为PDU。对于某个协议层而言,其处理的数据可以称为SDU,其输出的数据可以称为PDU。As can be seen from the above, data transmitted between the same protocol layers can be called SDU, and data transmitted between adjacent protocol layers can be called PDU. For a certain protocol layer, the data it processes can be called SDU, and the data it outputs can be called PDU.
例如,终端设备110的RRC层处理的数据为RRC SDU,RRC层将RRC SDU加上协议控制信息(protocol control information,PCI)后,封装成RRC PDU。RRC PDU经过PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和PHY层的处理后通过无线信号传输至网络设备120。达到网络设备120的无线信号承载的信息依次经过PHY层、MAC层、RLC层和PDCP层的处理,以RRC PDU的形式到达RRC层,RRC层对RRC PDU进行解封装,去掉PCI,还原出RRC SDU。For example, the data processed by the RRC layer of the terminal device 110 is RRC SDU. The RRC layer adds protocol control information (PCI) to the RRC SDU and encapsulates it into RRC PDU. The RRC PDU is processed by the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the PHY layer, and then transmitted to the network device 120 via a wireless signal. The information carried by the wireless signal reaching the network device 120 is processed by the PHY layer, the MAC layer, the RLC layer, and the PDCP layer in sequence, and reaches the RRC layer in the form of RRC PDU. The RRC layer decapsulates the RRC PDU, removes the PCI, and restores the RRC SDU.
若一个SDU的数据量较大,终端设备110可以将该SDU分成多段,封装成多个PDU发送出去,网络设备120将该多个PDU解封后重新装配成SDU。若多个SDU的数据量较小,终端设备110可以将该多个SDU拼接起来,封装为一个PDU发送出去,网络设备120将该PDU解封装后,将多个SDU分离出来。If the data volume of an SDU is large, the terminal device 110 can divide the SDU into multiple segments, encapsulate them into multiple PDUs and send them out, and the network device 120 decapsulates the multiple PDUs and reassembles them into SDUs. If the data volume of multiple SDUs is small, the terminal device 110 can splice the multiple SDUs together, encapsulate them into one PDU and send them out, and the network device 120 decapsulates the PDU and separates the multiple SDUs.
为便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请实施例中涉及到的技术做简单介绍。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following is a brief introduction to the technologies involved in the embodiments of the present application.
1、预编码技术。1. Precoding technology.
发送设备(如网络设备)可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配,从而使得接收设备(如终端设备)消除信道间影响的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。因此,采用预编码技术,可以实现发送设备与多个接收设备在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。When the channel state is known, the transmitting device (such as a network device) can process the signal to be transmitted with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel state, so that the precoded signal to be transmitted is adapted to the channel, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as a terminal device) in eliminating the influence between channels. Therefore, by precoding the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (such as the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)) is improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize the transmission of the transmitting device and multiple receiving devices on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.
应理解,有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送设备还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如,信道矩阵)的情况下,用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,不再赘述。It should be understood that the relevant description of the precoding technology is only for ease of understanding and is not intended to limit the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application. In the specific implementation process, the sending device can also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (e.g., channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a pre-set precoding matrix or weighted processing method. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated.
2、信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)。2. Channel state information (CSI).
在无线通信系统中,由接收设备向发送设备上报的用于描述通信链路的信道属性的信息。例如,CSI报告中可以包括:PMI、秩指示(rank indication,RI)、信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)资源指示(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)以及层指示(layer indicator,LI)等。应理解,以上列举的CSI的具体内容仅为示例性说明,不对本申请构成任何限定。CSI可以包括上文所列举的一项或多项,也可以包括除上述列举之外的其他用于表征CSI的信息,本申请对此不作限定。In a wireless communication system, information used to describe the channel properties of a communication link reported by a receiving device to a transmitting device. For example, a CSI report may include: PMI, rank indication (RI), channel quality indicator (CQI), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI), and layer indicator (LI), etc. It should be understood that the specific contents of the CSI listed above are only exemplary and do not constitute any limitation to this application. CSI may include one or more of the items listed above, and may also include other information used to characterize CSI in addition to the above items, and this application does not limit this.
3、PMI。3. PMI.
PMI可用于指示预编码矩阵,该预编码矩阵例如可以是终端设备基于各个频域单元的信道矩阵确定的预编码矩阵,该信道矩阵可以是终端设备通过信道估计或者基于信道互易性等方式确定。PMI can be used to indicate a precoding matrix, which can be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on a channel matrix of each frequency domain unit, which can be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or based on channel reciprocity.
例如,预编码矩阵可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)的方式获得,或者,也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decomposition,EVD)的方式获得。应理解,上文中列举的预编码矩阵的确定方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。For example, the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition (EVD) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. It should be understood that the determination methods of the precoding matrix listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the sake of brevity, they are not listed here one by one.
终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵可以称为待反馈的预编码矩阵,或者说,待上报的预编码矩阵。终端设备可以通过PMI指示该待反馈的预编码矩阵,以便于网络设备基于PMI恢复出预编码矩阵。网络设备基于该PMI恢复出的预编码矩阵可以与待反馈的预编码矩阵相同或相近似。The precoding matrix determined by the terminal device may be referred to as the precoding matrix to be fed back, or the precoding matrix to be reported. The terminal device may indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through the PMI, so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI. The precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same as or similar to the precoding matrix to be fed back.
网络设备可以基于终端设备的反馈确定与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备由此而确定的预编码矩阵可以直接用于下行数据传输;也可以经过一些的处理得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵,该波束成形方法例如是:迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、正则化迫零(regularized zero-forcing,RZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、或者最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise, SLNR)等。本申请对此不作限定。The network device can determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device. The precoding matrix thus determined by the network device can be directly used for downlink data transmission; or it can be processed to obtain the precoding matrix finally used for downlink data transmission. The beamforming method is, for example: zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), or maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise ratio (SLR) SLNR) etc. This application does not limit this.
在下行信道测量中,网络设备根据PMI恢复的预编码矩阵与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵的近似度越高,其确定出的用于数据传输的预编码矩阵也就越能够与下行信道相适配,也就能够提高信号的传输质量。In downlink channel measurement, the higher the degree of similarity between the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI and the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, the more the precoding matrix determined by the network device for data transmission can be adapted to the downlink channel, thereby improving the transmission quality of the signal.
应理解,PMI仅为一种示例性的命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他名称的信令以表征相同或相似功能的可能。It should be understood that PMI is only an exemplary name and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of defining signaling with other names in future protocols to represent the same or similar functions.
4、空间层(layer)。4. Spatial layer (layer).
空间层也可以称为传输层、层、传输流、空间流、或流。在本申请实施例中,空间层数可以由终端设备基于信道测量而反馈的秩(rank)确定。例如,空间层数可以等于终端设备基于信道测量而反馈的秩。A spatial layer may also be referred to as a transport layer, layer, transport stream, spatial stream, or stream. In an embodiment of the present application, the number of spatial layers may be determined by the rank fed back by the terminal device based on channel measurement. For example, the number of spatial layers may be equal to the rank fed back by the terminal device based on channel measurement.
在MIMO中,一个空间层可以看成是一个可独立传输的数据流。为了提高频谱资源的利用率,提高通信系统的数据传输能力,网络设备可以通过多个空间层向终端设备传输数据。In MIMO, a spatial layer can be regarded as an independently transmittable data stream. In order to improve the utilization of spectrum resources and the data transmission capacity of the communication system, network equipment can transmit data to terminal equipment through multiple spatial layers.
空间层数也就是信道矩阵的秩。终端设备可以根据信道估计所得到的信道矩阵确定空间层数R,进一步确定预编码矩阵。例如,可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行SVD来确定预编码矩阵。在SVD过程中,可以按照特征值的大小来区分不同的空间层。例如,可以将最大的特征值所对应的特征向量所确定的预编码向量与第1个空间层对应,并可以将最小的特征值所对应的特征向量所确定的预编码向量与第R个空间层对应。即,第1个空间层至第R个空间层所对应的特征值依次减小。简单来说,R个空间层中自第1个空间层至第R个空间层强度依次递减。The number of spatial layers is the rank of the channel matrix. The terminal device can determine the number of spatial layers R according to the channel matrix obtained by channel estimation, and further determine the precoding matrix. For example, the precoding matrix can be determined by performing SVD on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. In the SVD process, different spatial layers can be distinguished according to the size of the eigenvalue. For example, the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue can be corresponded to the first spatial layer, and the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the smallest eigenvalue can be corresponded to the Rth spatial layer. That is, the eigenvalues corresponding to the first spatial layer to the Rth spatial layer decrease successively. Simply put, the strength of the R spatial layers decreases from the first spatial layer to the Rth spatial layer.
应理解,基于特征值来区分不同的空间层仅为一种可能的实现方式,不对本申请构成任何限定。例如,协议也可以预先定义区分空间层的其他准则,本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that distinguishing different spatial layers based on characteristic values is only a possible implementation method and does not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, the protocol may also predefine other criteria for distinguishing spatial layers, which is not limited in the present application.
5、预编码向量。5. Precoding vector.
一个预编码矩阵可以包括一个或多个向量,如列向量。一个预编码矩阵可以用于确定一个或多个预编码向量。A precoding matrix may include one or more vectors, such as column vectors. A precoding matrix may be used to determine one or more precoding vectors.
当空间层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数也为1时,预编码矩阵就是预编码向量。当空间层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数为1时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个空间层上的分量。当空间层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数为多个时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个极化方向上的分量。当空间层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数也为多个时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个空间层和一个极化方向上的分量。When the number of spatial layers is 1 and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is also 1, the precoding matrix is the precoding vector. When the number of spatial layers is multiple and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is 1, the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix on one spatial layer. When the number of spatial layers is 1 and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is multiple, the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one polarization direction. When the number of spatial layers is multiple and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is also multiple, the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one spatial layer and one polarization direction.
应理解,预编码向量也可以由预编码矩阵中的向量确定,如,对预编码矩阵中的向量进行数学变换后得到。本申请对于预编码矩阵与预编码向量之间的数学变换关系不作限定。It should be understood that the precoding vector may also be determined by a vector in a precoding matrix, for example, obtained by mathematically transforming the vector in the precoding matrix. The present application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
6、天线端口。6. Antenna port.
天线端口可以简称为端口。可以理解为被接收设备所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以预配置一个天线端口,每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合,每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号对应,因此,每个天线端口可以称为一个参考信号的端口,例如,CSI-RS端口、SRS端口等。在本申请实施例中,该参考信号可以是未经过预编码的参考信号,也可以是经过预编码的参考信号,本申请对此不作限定。当该参考信号是为经过预编码的参考信号时,该参考信号端口可以是发射天线端口,该发射天线端口可以是指独立的收发单元(transceiver unit)。The antenna port can be referred to as a port for short. It can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space. An antenna port can be preconfigured for each virtual antenna, and each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas. Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port, for example, a CSI-RS port, an SRS port, etc. In an embodiment of the present application, the reference signal can be a non-precoded reference signal or a precoded reference signal, and the present application does not limit this. When the reference signal is a precoded reference signal, the reference signal port can be a transmitting antenna port, and the transmitting antenna port can refer to an independent transceiver unit (transceiver unit).
7、空域基底。7. Airspace base.
空域基底也可以称为空域向量(spatial domain vector)、空域分量向量、波束向量、空域波束基向量、或空域基向量等。空域向量中的各个元素可以表示各个天线端口的权重。基于空域向量中各个元素所表示的各个天线端口的权重,将各个天线端口的信号做线性叠加,可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。The spatial basis can also be called a spatial domain vector, a spatial component vector, a beam vector, a spatial beam basis vector, or a spatial basis vector. Each element in the spatial vector can represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the spatial vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
空域向量的长度可以为一个极化方向上的发射天线端口数Ns,Ns≥1且为整数。空域向量例如可以是长度为Ns的列向量或行向量。本申请对此不作限定。The length of the spatial domain vector may be the number of transmit antenna ports in one polarization direction, N s , where N s ≥ 1 and is an integer. The spatial domain vector may be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length N s . This application does not limit this.
可选地,空域向量是离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transform,DFT)向量。DFT向量可以是指DFT矩阵中的向量。Optionally, the spatial domain vector is a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) vector. The DFT vector may refer to a vector in a DFT matrix.
可选地,空域向量是DFT向量的共轭转置向量。DFT共轭转置向量可以是指DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵中的列向量。Optionally, the spatial domain vector is a conjugate transposed vector of the DFT vector. The DFT conjugate transposed vector may refer to a column vector in a conjugate transposed matrix of the DFT matrix.
可选地,空域向量是过采样DFT向量。过采样DFT向量可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中的向量。 Optionally, the spatial domain vector is an oversampled DFT vector. The oversampled DFT vector may refer to a vector in an oversampled DFT matrix.
在本申请实施例中,空域向量是用于构建预编码矩阵的向量之一。In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial domain vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding matrix.
8、空域基底集合。8. Spatial basis set.
空域基底集合也可以称为候选空域向量集合、候选空域分量向量集合、空域分量向量集合、候选空域基向量集合、空域基向量集合、候选波束向量集合、波束向量集合、候选空域波束基向量集合、空域波束基向量集合等。可以包括多种不同长度的空域向量(或,候选空域向量),以与不同的天线端口数对应。在本申请实施例中,用于构建预编码向量的空域向量可以是从候选空域向量集合中确定的。或者说,候选空域向量集合中包括多个可用于构建预编码向量的候选空域向量。The spatial basis set may also be referred to as a candidate spatial vector set, a candidate spatial component vector set, a spatial component vector set, a candidate spatial basis vector set, a spatial basis vector set, a candidate beam vector set, a beam vector set, a candidate spatial beam basis vector set, a spatial beam basis vector set, etc. A plurality of spatial vectors (or candidate spatial vectors) of different lengths may be included to correspond to different numbers of antenna ports. In an embodiment of the present application, the spatial vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the candidate spatial vector set. In other words, the candidate spatial vector set includes a plurality of candidate spatial vectors that can be used to construct the precoding vector.
在一种可能的设计中,候选空域向量集合可以包括Ns个候选空域向量,该Ns个候选空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。候选空域向量集合中的每个候选空域向量可以是2D-DFT矩阵中的向量,其中,2D可以表示两个不同的方向,例如,水平方向和垂直方向。若水平方向和垂直方向的天线端口数目分别为N1和N2,那么Ns=N1×N2。Ns、N1和N2均为正整数。In one possible design, the candidate spatial vector set may include Ns candidate spatial vectors, and the Ns candidate spatial vectors may be mutually orthogonal. Each candidate spatial vector in the candidate spatial vector set may be a vector in a 2D-DFT matrix, where 2D may represent two different directions, for example, a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. If the number of antenna ports in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are N1 and N2 , respectively, then Ns = N1 × N2 . Ns , N1 , and N2 are all positive integers.
Ns个候选空域向量例如可以记作该Ns个候选空域向量可以构建矩阵Bs, 矩阵Bs可用于下文所述的空域压缩,以选择一个或多个用来构建预编码矩阵的候选空域向量。若候选空域向量集合中的每个候选空域向量取自2D-DFT矩阵,则其中DN表示N×N的正交DFT矩阵,该正交DFT矩阵的第m行第n列的元素为 Ns candidate spatial vectors can be recorded as The N s candidate spatial vectors can construct the matrix B s , The matrix Bs can be used for the spatial compression described below to select one or more candidate spatial vectors for constructing a precoding matrix. If each candidate spatial vector in the set of candidate spatial vectors is taken from a 2D-DFT matrix, then Where D N represents an N×N orthogonal DFT matrix, and the element in the mth row and nth column of the orthogonal DFT matrix is
在另一种可能的设计中,候选空域向量集合可以通过过采样因子Os扩展为Os×Ns个候选空域向量。在此情况下,该候选空域向量集合可以包括Os个子集,每个子集可以包括Ns个候选空域向量。每个子集中的Ns个候选空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该候选空域向量集合中的每个候选空域向量可以取自过采样2D-DFT矩阵。例如,过采样因子Os为正整数,Os=O1×O2,O1可以是水平方向的过采样因子,O2可以是垂直方向的过采样因子。O1≥1,O2≥1,O1和O2不同时为1,且均为正整数。In another possible design, the candidate spatial domain vector set can be expanded to Os × Ns candidate spatial domain vectors by an oversampling factor Os . In this case, the candidate spatial domain vector set can include Os subsets, and each subset can include Ns candidate spatial domain vectors. The Ns candidate spatial domain vectors in each subset can be mutually orthogonal. Each candidate spatial domain vector in the candidate spatial domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix. For example, the oversampling factor Os is a positive integer, Os = O1 × O2 , O1 can be an oversampling factor in the horizontal direction, and O2 can be an oversampling factor in the vertical direction. O1 ≥1, O2 ≥1, O1 and O2 are not 1 at the same time, and both are positive integers.
该候选空域向量集合中的第os(0≤os≤Os-1,且os为整数)个子集中的Ns个候选空域向量例如可以分别记作则基于第os个子集中的Ns个候选空域向量可以构造矩阵 由Os个子集中的一个子集或多个子集构成的矩阵可以用于进行下文所述的空域压缩,以选择一个或多个用来构建预编码矩阵的空域向量。The N s candidate spatial domain vectors in the o s th subset (0≤o s ≤O s -1, and o s is an integer) of the candidate spatial domain vector set can be respectively recorded as Then based on the N s candidate spatial vectors in the o sth subset, the matrix can be constructed A matrix consisting of one or more subsets of the O s subsets may be used to perform the spatial domain compression described below to select one or more spatial domain vectors for constructing a precoding matrix.
应理解,本申请对于候选空域向量集合的具体形式以及候选空域向量的具体形式不作限定。It should be understood that the present application does not limit the specific form of the candidate spatial domain vector set and the specific form of the candidate spatial domain vector.
9、频域单元。9. Frequency domain unit.
频域单元是频域资源的单位,可表示不同的频域资源粒度。频域单元例如可以包括:子带(subband)、资源块(resource block,RB)、子载波、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)或预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。此外,一个频域单元的频域长度还可以为CQI子带的R倍,其中,R小于或等于1,R的取值例如可以为1,或者,R的取值可以由网络设备预先通过信令配置给终端设备。此外,一个频域单元的频域长度还可以为RB。The frequency domain unit is a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different frequency domain resource granularities. The frequency domain unit may include, for example, a subband, a resource block (RB), a subcarrier, a resource block group (RBG), or a precoding resource block group (PRG). In addition, the frequency domain length of a frequency domain unit may also be R times the CQI subband, where R is less than or equal to 1, and the value of R may be, for example, 1, or the value of R may be pre-configured to the terminal device by the network device through signaling. In addition, the frequency domain length of a frequency domain unit may also be RB.
在本申请实施例中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可以是指基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道测量和反馈而确定的预编码矩阵。与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可用于对后续通过该频域单元传输的数据做预编码。下文中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵也可以简称为该频域单元的预编码矩阵。In an embodiment of the present application, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by channel measurement and feedback based on a reference signal on the frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may be used to precode data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit.
10、频域基底。10. Frequency domain basis.
频域基底也可以称为频域向量(frequency domain vector)、频域分量向量、或频域基向量等,可用于表示信道在频域的变化规律。每个频域向量可以表示一种变化规律。由于信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。因此,可以通过不同的频域向量来表示不同传输路径上时延导致的信道在频域上的变化规律。The frequency domain basis can also be called a frequency domain vector, a frequency domain component vector, or a frequency domain basis vector, etc., which can be used to represent the changing pattern of the channel in the frequency domain. Each frequency domain vector can represent a changing pattern. When a signal is transmitted through a wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna from the transmitting antenna through multiple paths. Multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of the frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the changing pattern of the channel in the frequency domain caused by the delay on different transmission paths.
频域向量的长度可以记作Nf,Nf为正整数,频域向量例如可以是长度为Nf的列向量或行向量。频域向量的长度可以由在上报带宽中预配置的待上报的频域单元的数量确定,也可以由该上报带宽的长度确定,还可以是协议预定义值。本申请对于频域向量的长度不做限定。其中,所述上报带宽例如可以是指通过高层信令中的CSI上报预配置中携带的CSI上报带宽(csi-ReportingBand)。The length of the frequency domain vector can be denoted as Nf , where Nf is a positive integer. The frequency domain vector can be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length Nf . The length of the frequency domain vector can be determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported preconfigured in the reporting bandwidth, or by the length of the reporting bandwidth, or by a protocol predefined value. This application does not limit the length of the frequency domain vector. Among them, the reporting bandwidth can, for example, refer to the CSI reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) carried in the CSI reporting preconfiguration in the high-level signaling.
每个空间层对应的所有空域向量对应的频域向量,所有频域向量可以称为该空间层对应的频域向量。每个空间层对应的频域向量可以相同,也可以不相同。 The frequency domain vectors corresponding to all spatial domain vectors corresponding to each spatial layer may be referred to as the frequency domain vectors corresponding to the spatial layer. The frequency domain vectors corresponding to each spatial layer may be the same or different.
11、频域基底集合。11. Frequency domain basis set.
频域基底集合也可以称为候选频域向量集合、候选频域分量向量集合、频域分量向量集合、频域基向量集合、或频域向量集合等,可以包括多种不同长度的候选频域向量。在本申请实施例中,用于构建预编码向量的频域向量可以是从候选频域向量集合中确定的。或者说,候选频域向量集合中包括多个可用于构建预编码向量的候选频域向量。The frequency domain basis set may also be referred to as a candidate frequency domain vector set, a candidate frequency domain component vector set, a frequency domain component vector set, a frequency domain basis vector set, or a frequency domain vector set, etc., and may include candidate frequency domain vectors of multiple different lengths. In an embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the candidate frequency domain vector set. In other words, the candidate frequency domain vector set includes multiple candidate frequency domain vectors that can be used to construct the precoding vector.
在一种可能的设计中,该候选频域向量集合可以包括Nf个候选频域向量。该Nf个候选频域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该候选频域向量集合中的每个候选频域向量可以是DFT矩阵或逆离散傅里叶变换(inverse discrete fourier transform,IDFT)矩阵中的向量,其中,IDFT矩阵即DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵。In one possible design, the candidate frequency domain vector set may include N f candidate frequency domain vectors. The N f candidate frequency domain vectors may be mutually orthogonal. Each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set may be a vector in a DFT matrix or an inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT) matrix, wherein the IDFT matrix is a conjugate transposed matrix of the DFT matrix.
该Nf个候选频域向量例如可以记作该Nf个候选频域向量可以构建矩阵Bf,该矩阵可用于进行下文所述的频域压缩,以选择一个或多个用来构建预编码矩阵的频域向量。The N f candidate frequency domain vectors can be expressed as The N f candidate frequency domain vectors can construct the matrix B f , This matrix may be used to perform frequency domain compression as described below to select one or more frequency domain vectors used to construct a precoding matrix.
在另一种可能的设计中,该候选频域向量集合可以通过过采样因子Of扩展为Of×Nf个候选频域基向量。此情况下,该候选频域向量集合可以包括Of个子集,每个子集可以包括Nf个候选频域基向量。每个子集中的Nf个候选频域基向量之间可以两两相互正交。该候选频域向量集合中的每个候选频域向量可以取自过采样DFT矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵。其中,过采样因子Of为正整数。In another possible design, the candidate frequency domain vector set can be expanded to Of × Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors by an oversampling factor Of . In this case, the candidate frequency domain vector set can include Of subsets, each of which can include Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors. The Nf candidate frequency domain basis vectors in each subset can be mutually orthogonal. Each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix or a conjugate transposed matrix of an oversampled DFT matrix. Wherein, the oversampling factor Of is a positive integer.
因此,候选频域向量集合中的各候选频域向量可以取自DFT矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵,或者取自DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵的共轭转置矩阵。该候选频域向量集合中的每个列向量可以称为一个DFT向量或过采样DFT向量。换句话说,候选频域向量可以为DFT向量或过采样DFT向量。Therefore, each candidate frequency domain vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix, or from a conjugate transposed matrix of a DFT matrix or a conjugate transposed matrix of an oversampled DFT matrix. Each column vector in the candidate frequency domain vector set can be called a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector. In other words, the candidate frequency domain vector can be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
12、空频向量对。12. Space-frequency vector pair.
空频向量对也可以称为空频分量向量,一个空域向量和一个频域向量可以组合得到一个空频向量对。换句话说,一个空频向量对可以包括一个空域向量和一个频域向量。由一个空频向量对中的空域向量和频域向量可以得到一个空频分量矩阵,如,将一个空域向量与一个频域向量的共轭转置相乘,可以得到一个空频分量矩阵。这里所述的空频分量矩阵是相对于下文所述的空频矩阵而言的。由于对多个空频分量矩阵加权求和可以得到空频矩阵。因此用于加权的每一项可以称为一个空频矩阵的分量,即这里所说的空频分量矩阵。A space-frequency vector pair can also be called a space-frequency component vector. A space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector can be combined to obtain a space-frequency vector pair. In other words, a space-frequency vector pair can include a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector. A space-frequency component matrix can be obtained by the space-domain vector and the frequency-domain vector in a space-frequency vector pair. For example, a space-frequency component matrix can be obtained by multiplying a space-domain vector with the conjugate transpose of a frequency-domain vector. The space-frequency component matrix described here is relative to the space-frequency matrix described below. Since a space-frequency matrix can be obtained by weighted summation of multiple space-frequency component matrices, each item used for weighting can be called a component of a space-frequency matrix, i.e., the space-frequency component matrix mentioned here.
13、空频矩阵。13. Space-frequency matrix.
在本申请实施例中,空频矩阵可以理解为用于确定每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵或信道矩阵的一个中间量。对于终端设备来说,空频矩阵可以由每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵或信道矩阵确定。对于网络设备来说,空频矩阵可以由多个空频分量矩阵的加权和得到,以恢复信道矩阵或预编码矩阵。In the embodiment of the present application, the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix or channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. For a terminal device, the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. For a network device, the space-frequency matrix can be obtained by the weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices to restore the channel matrix or precoding matrix.
例如,空频矩阵可以记作W,其中,w0至是与Nf个频域单元对应的Nf个列向量,每个列向量可以是每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。该Nf个列向量分别对应Nf个频域单元的预编码向量。即空频矩阵可以视为将Nf个频域单元对应的预编码向量组合构成的联合矩阵。For example, the space-frequency matrix can be denoted as W, Among them, w 0 to There are N f column vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units, and each column vector may be a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. The N f column vectors correspond to the precoding vectors of the N f frequency domain units, respectively. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix composed of the precoding vectors corresponding to the N f frequency domain units.
在一种可能的设计中,空频矩阵可以与空间层对应。之所以称空频矩阵与空间层对应,是由于终端设备可以基于每个空间层反馈频域向量和空频合并系数。网络设备基于终端设备的反馈而确定的空频矩阵也就是与空间层对应的空频矩阵。与空间层对应的空频矩阵可直接用于确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。与某一频域单元对应的预编码矩阵例如可以是由各个空间层对应的空频矩阵中对应于同一频域单元的列向量构造而成。例如,将各空间层对应的空频矩阵中的第n(0≤n≤N3-1,且n为整数)个列向量抽取出来,按照空间层的顺序由左到右排布可得到维度为Ns×Z的矩阵,Z表示空间层数,Z≥1且为整数。对该矩阵进行归一化处理,例如乘以功率归一化系数等,便可以得到该第n个频域单元的预编码矩阵。In a possible design, the space-frequency matrix may correspond to the spatial layer. The space-frequency matrix is said to correspond to the spatial layer because the terminal device can feedback the frequency domain vector and the space-frequency combining coefficient based on each spatial layer. The space-frequency matrix determined by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device is the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer. The space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer can be directly used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit can be constructed by, for example, the column vector corresponding to the same frequency domain unit in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer. For example, the nth (0≤n≤N 3 -1, and n is an integer) column vector in the space-frequency matrix corresponding to each spatial layer is extracted and arranged from left to right in the order of the spatial layer to obtain a matrix of dimension N s ×Z, where Z represents the number of spatial layers, and Z≥1 is an integer. The matrix is normalized, for example, multiplied by a power normalization coefficient, to obtain the precoding matrix of the nth frequency domain unit.
应理解,通过乘以功率归一化系数来对该矩阵进行归一化处理仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于归一化处理的具体方式不作限定。It should be understood that normalizing the matrix by multiplying the power normalization coefficient is only one possible implementation method and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The present application does not limit the specific method of normalization.
应理解,空频矩阵仅为用于确定预编码矩阵或信道矩阵的中间量的一种表现形式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,将空频矩阵中的各列向量按从左至右的顺序依次首位相接,或者按照其他预定义的规则排列,也可以得到长度为Ns×Nf的向量,该向量可以称为空频向量。It should be understood that the space-frequency matrix is only a form of expression for determining an intermediate quantity of a precoding matrix or a channel matrix, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, by connecting the column vectors in the space-frequency matrix in order from left to right, or arranging them according to other predefined rules, a vector with a length of Ns × Nf can also be obtained, which can be called a space-frequency vector.
还应理解,上文所示的空频矩阵和空频向量的维度仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,该空频矩阵也可以是维度为Nf×Ns的矩阵。其中,每个行向量可对应于一个频域单元,用于确定所对应 的频域单元的预编码向量。It should also be understood that the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and the space-frequency vector shown above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix with a dimension of Nf × Ns . Each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit, which is used to determine the corresponding The precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
此外,当发射天线配置有多个极化方向时,空频矩阵的维度还可以进一步扩展。例如,对于双极化方向天线,空频矩阵的维度可以为2Ns×Nf或Nf×2Ns。应理解,本申请对于发射天线的极化方向数不作限定。In addition, when the transmitting antenna is configured with multiple polarization directions, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded. For example, for a dual-polarization antenna, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2Ns × Nf or Nf × 2Ns . It should be understood that the present application does not limit the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna.
14、组合系数。14. Combination coefficient.
组合系数也可以称为空频合并系数、空频系数、合并系数、或加权系数等。每个空频合并系数可对应一个空域向量和一个频域向量,或者说,每个空频合并系数可对应一个空频向量对。每个空频合并系数是其所对应的空频向量对所构建的空频分量矩阵的加权系数(或,权重)。空频合并系数与一个空域向量和一个频域向量对应。具体地,空频合并系数矩阵中第i行第j列的元素为第i个空域向量与第j个频域向量构成的空频向量对所对应的空频合并系数。对于双极化方向天线,上述i∈{1,2,...,2L},每个空域向量的长度为2Ns。The combination coefficient may also be referred to as a space-frequency combining coefficient, a space-frequency coefficient, a combining coefficient, or a weighted coefficient, etc. Each space-frequency combining coefficient may correspond to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, or in other words, each space-frequency combining coefficient may correspond to a space-frequency vector pair. Each space-frequency combining coefficient is a weighted coefficient (or, weight) of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by the space-frequency vector pair to which it corresponds. The space-frequency combining coefficient corresponds to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector. Specifically, the element in the i-th row and j-th column of the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix is the space-frequency combining coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair formed by the i-th space-domain vector and the j-th frequency-domain vector. For dual-polarization directional antennas, the above i∈{1,2,...,2L}, and the length of each space-domain vector is 2N s .
在一种实现方式中,为了控制上报开销,终端设备可以仅上报空频合并系数矩阵中包含的2LM个空频合并系数的子集。例如,网络设备可以配置每个空间层对应的终端设备可以上报的空频合并系数的最大数量K0,其中K0≤2LM。K0与中包含的空频合并系数总数2LM可以存在比例关系,例如K0=β·2LM,β的取值可以为此外,终端设备可以仅上报K1个幅度非0的空频合并系数,K1≤K0。In one implementation, in order to control the reporting overhead, the terminal device may only report the space-frequency combining coefficient matrix For example, the network device may configure the maximum number of space-frequency combining coefficients K 0 that can be reported by the terminal device corresponding to each spatial layer, where K 0 ≤ 2LM. K 0 is The total number of space-frequency combining coefficients 2LM included in may have a proportional relationship, for example, K 0 =β·2LM, and the value of β may be In addition, the terminal device may report only K 1 space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitudes, where K 1 ≤K 0 .
每个空频合并系数可以包括幅度和相位。例如空频合并系数aejθ中,a为幅度,θ为相位。Each space-frequency combining coefficient may include an amplitude and a phase. For example, in the space-frequency combining coefficients ae jθ , a is the amplitude and θ is the phase.
在一种实现方式中,对于上报的K1个空频合并系数,其幅度值和相位值可以进行独立的量化。其中,对于幅度的量化方法包含以下步骤:In one implementation, for the K 1 reported space-frequency combining coefficients, their amplitude values and phase values can be independently quantized. The quantization method for the amplitude includes the following steps:
1)对于K1个空频合并系数,以幅度值最大的空频合并系数为参照,对K1个空频合并系数进行归一化,若第i个空频合并系数归一化前为ci,则归一化后为ci′=ci/ci·,其中,ci·为幅度值最大的空频合并系数。归一化后,量化参考幅度值最大的空频合并系数为1。1) For K 1 space-frequency combining coefficients, the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value is used as a reference to normalize the K 1 space-frequency combining coefficients. If the i-th space-frequency combining coefficient before normalization is c i , then after normalization, c i ′=c i /c i ·, where c i · is the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value. After normalization, the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest quantized reference amplitude value is 1.
2)终端设备上报幅度值最大的空频合并系数的索引,指示幅度值最大的空频合并系数的索引的指示信息可以包含比特。2) The terminal device reports the index of the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value. The indication information indicating the index of the space-frequency combining coefficient with the largest amplitude value may include: Bit.
3)对于幅度值最大的空频合并系数所在的极化方向,量化参考幅度值为1。对于另一个极化方向,该极化方向内幅度最大的空频合并系数的幅度可以作为该极化方向的量化参考幅度值。对该量化参考幅度值采用4比特进行量化并上报,候选的量化参考幅度值包括 3) For the polarization direction where the space-frequency combination coefficient with the largest amplitude value is located, the quantization reference amplitude value is 1. For another polarization direction, the amplitude of the space-frequency combination coefficient with the largest amplitude in this polarization direction can be used as the quantization reference amplitude value of this polarization direction. The quantization reference amplitude value is quantized and reported using 4 bits. The candidate quantization reference amplitude values include
4)对于每个极化方向,分别以该极化方向对应的量化参考幅度值为参照,对每一个空频合并系数的差分幅度值进行3比特量化,候选的差分幅度值包括差分幅度值表示相对于该极化方向所对应的量化参考幅度值的差异值,若一个空频合并系数所在极化方向所对应的量化参考幅度值为A,该空频合并系数量化后的差分幅度值为B,则该空频合并系数量化后的幅度值为A*B。4) For each polarization direction, the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction is used as a reference, and the differential amplitude value of each space-frequency combining coefficient is quantized by 3 bits. The candidate differential amplitude values include The differential amplitude value represents the difference value relative to the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction. If the quantization reference amplitude value corresponding to the polarization direction of a space-frequency combining coefficient is A, and the differential amplitude value of the space-frequency combining coefficient after quantization is B, then the amplitude value of the space-frequency combining coefficient after quantization is A*B.
5)对于每个归一化后的空频合并系数的相位,通过3比特或者4比特进行量化,其中,3比特可用于8相移键控(phase shift keying,PSK)场景,4比特可用于16PSK场景。5) The phase of each normalized space-frequency combining coefficient is quantized by 3 bits or 4 bits, where 3 bits can be used for 8-phase shift keying (PSK) scenarios and 4 bits can be used for 16PSK scenarios.
在终端设备所选择的用于构建预编码矩阵的多个空频向量对中,每个空频向量对可以对应一个空频合并系数。与多个空频向量对所对应的多个空频合并系数中,有些空频合并系数的幅度值可能为零,或者接近零,其对应的量化值可以是零。通过量化值零来量化幅度的空频合并系数可以称为幅度为零的空频合并系数。相对应地,有些空频合并系数的幅度值较大,其对应的量化值不为零。通过非零的量化值来量化幅度的空频合并系数可以称为幅度非零的空频合并系数。换句话说,与多个空频向量对对应的多个空频合并系数可以由一个或多个幅度非零的空频合并系数以及一个或多个幅度为零的空频合并系数组成。Among the multiple space-frequency vector pairs selected by the terminal device for constructing the precoding matrix, each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a space-frequency combining coefficient. Among the multiple space-frequency combining coefficients corresponding to the multiple space-frequency vector pairs, the amplitude values of some space-frequency combining coefficients may be zero, or close to zero, and the corresponding quantization value may be zero. The space-frequency combining coefficients whose amplitude is quantized by the quantization value zero can be called the space-frequency combining coefficients with zero amplitude. Correspondingly, the amplitude values of some space-frequency combining coefficients are large, and the corresponding quantization values are not zero. The space-frequency combining coefficients whose amplitude is quantized by a non-zero quantization value can be called the space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitude. In other words, the multiple space-frequency combining coefficients corresponding to the multiple space-frequency vector pairs can be composed of one or more space-frequency combining coefficients with non-zero amplitude and one or more space-frequency combining coefficients with zero amplitude.
应理解,空频合并系数可以通过量化值指示,也可以通过量化值的索引指示,或者也可以通过非量化值指示,本申请对于空频合并系数的指示方式不作限定,只要使得接收端能够获知空频合并系数即可。 下文中,为方便说明,将用于指示空频合并系数的信息称为空频合并系数的量化信息。该量化信息例如可以是量化值、索引或者其他任何可用于指示空频合并系数的信息。It should be understood that the space-frequency combining coefficient can be indicated by a quantized value, by an index of a quantized value, or by a non-quantized value. The present application does not limit the indication method of the space-frequency combining coefficient, as long as the receiving end can obtain the space-frequency combining coefficient. Hereinafter, for the convenience of explanation, the information used to indicate the space-frequency combining coefficient is referred to as the quantization information of the space-frequency combining coefficient. The quantization information may be, for example, a quantization value, an index or any other information that may be used to indicate the space-frequency combining coefficient.
15、双域压缩。15. Dual domain compression.
双域压缩可以包括空域压缩和频域压缩这两个维度的压缩。空域压缩具体可以是指空域向量集合中选择一个或多个空域向量作为构建预编码矩阵的向量。频域压缩可以是指在频域向量集合中选择一个或多个频域向量作为构建预编码矩阵的向量。如前所述,一个空域向量和一个频域向量所构建的矩阵可以称为空频分量矩阵。被选择的一个或多个空域向量以及一个或多个频域向量可以构建一个或多个空频分量矩阵。该一个或多个空频分量矩阵的加权和可用于构建与一个空间层对应的空频矩阵。换句话说,空频矩阵可以近似为由上述被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量所构建的空频分量矩阵的加权和。基于一个空间层对应的空频矩阵,可以确定该空间层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量。Dual-domain compression may include compression in two dimensions: spatial domain compression and frequency domain compression. Spatial domain compression may specifically refer to selecting one or more spatial domain vectors from a set of spatial domain vectors as vectors for constructing a precoding matrix. Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as vectors for constructing a precoding matrix. As previously mentioned, a matrix constructed by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector may be referred to as a space-frequency component matrix. The selected one or more spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors may construct one or more space-frequency component matrices. The weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices may be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to a spatial layer. In other words, the space-frequency matrix may be approximated as the weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrices constructed by the above-selected one or more spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors. Based on the space-frequency matrix corresponding to a spatial layer, the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the spatial layer may be determined.
例如,选择的一个或多个空域向量可以构成矩阵W1,其中,W1中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个空域向量。选择的一个或多个频域向量可以构成矩阵W3,其中W3中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个频域向量。空频矩阵W可以表示为选择的一个或多个空域向量与选择的一个或多个频域向量线性合并的结果。以与空间层对应的空频矩阵为例,一个空间层对应的空频矩阵可以表示为 For example, the selected one or more spatial domain vectors may constitute a matrix W 1 , where each column vector in W 1 corresponds to a selected spatial domain vector. The selected one or more frequency domain vectors may constitute a matrix W 3 , where each column vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector. The space-frequency matrix W may be represented as a result of linearly combining the selected one or more spatial domain vectors and the selected one or more frequency domain vectors. Taking the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the spatial layer as an example, the space-frequency matrix corresponding to a spatial layer may be represented as
当秩R大于1时,各个空间层所使用的空域向量可以是不完全相同的,即,各空间层使用独立的空域向量;各个空间层所使用的空域向量也可以是相同的,即,多个空间层共用L个空域向量。When the rank R is greater than 1, the spatial domain vectors used by each spatial layer may not be exactly the same, that is, each spatial layer uses an independent spatial domain vector; the spatial domain vectors used by each spatial layer may also be the same, that is, multiple spatial layers share L spatial domain vectors.
当秩R大于1时,各个空间层所使用的频域向量可以是不完全相同的,即,各空间层使用独立的频域向量;各个空间层所使用的频域向量也可以是相同的,即,多个空间层共用M个频域向量。假设各个空间层使用各自独立的频域向量。例如,R个空间层中的第i(0≤i≤R-1,i为整数)个空间层对应Mi个频域向量,即,终端设备上报的与第i个空间层对应的频域向量为Mi个。其中Mi≥1,且Mi为整数。When the rank R is greater than 1, the frequency domain vectors used by each spatial layer may not be exactly the same, that is, each spatial layer uses an independent frequency domain vector; the frequency domain vectors used by each spatial layer may also be the same, that is, multiple spatial layers share M frequency domain vectors. Assume that each spatial layer uses its own independent frequency domain vector. For example, the i-th (0≤i≤R-1, i is an integer) spatial layer among the R spatial layers corresponds to Mi frequency domain vectors, that is, the frequency domain vectors corresponding to the i-th spatial layer reported by the terminal device are Mi. Where Mi ≥1, and Mi is an integer.
在这种情况下,第i个空间层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量可以是基于上述L个空域向量和Mi个频域向量构建的。In this case, the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the i-th spatial layer may be constructed based on the above L spatial domain vectors and M i frequency domain vectors.
若采用双极化方向的发射天线,每个极化方向可以选择L个空域向量。则W1的维度可以是2Ns×2L。在一种可能的实现方式中,两个极化方向可以采用相同的L个空域向量其中,
例如可以是从上文所述的空域向量集合中选择的L个空域向量。此时,W1可以表示为:
If dual-polarization transmitting antennas are used, L spatial vectors can be selected for each polarization direction. Then the dimension of W1 can be 2Ns × 2L. In a possible implementation, the same L spatial vectors can be used for the two polarization directions. in, For example, it can be L spatial vectors selected from the spatial vector set mentioned above. In this case, W1 can be expressed as:
其中,表示选择的L个空域向量中的第i个空域向量,i=0,1,…,L-1。in, Represents the i-th spatial domain vector among the selected L spatial domain vectors, i=0, 1,…, L-1.
对于第i个空间层,W3 H的维度可以为Mi×Nf。W3中的每一个列向量可以是一个频域向量。此时W1中的每个空域向量和W3中的每个频域向量可以构成一个空频向量对,每个空频向量对可以对应一个空频合并系数,则有2L个空域向量和Mi个频域向量所构建的2L×Mi个空频向量对与2L×Mi个空频合并系数一一对应。For the i-th spatial layer, the dimension of W 3 H may be Mi ×N f . Each column vector in W 3 may be a frequency domain vector. At this time, each spatial domain vector in W 1 and each frequency domain vector in W 3 may constitute a space-frequency vector pair, and each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a space-frequency combining coefficient. Then, there are 2L×M i space-frequency vector pairs constructed by 2L spatial domain vectors and Mi frequency domain vectors, and the 2L× M i space -frequency combining coefficients correspond one to one.
对于第i个空间层,可以是由上述2L×Mi个空频合并系数构成的系数矩阵,其维度可以为2L×Mi。中的第l行可以对应2L个空域向量中第一极化方向上的第l个空域向量,中的第L+l行可以对应2L个空域向量中第二极化方向上的第l个空域向量。中的第m(0≤m≤Mi-1,且m为整数)个列可以对应Mi个频域向量中的第m个频域向量。For the i-th spatial layer, It may be a coefficient matrix composed of the above 2L×M i space-frequency combining coefficients, and its dimension may be 2L×M i . The lth row in can correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction among the 2L spatial vectors. The L+lth row in can correspond to the lth spatial domain vector in the second polarization direction among the 2L spatial domain vectors. The m-th (0≤m≤M i -1, and m is an integer) column in can correspond to the m-th frequency domain vector among the M i frequency domain vectors.
因此,在双域压缩的反馈方式中,R个空间层中每个空间层对应的频域向量和空域向量,被选择用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置以及每个空频向量对的空频合并系数。Therefore, in the dual-domain compressed feedback method, the frequency domain vector and the spatial domain vector corresponding to each of the R spatial layers are selected to construct the position of the space-frequency vector pair of the precoding matrix and the space-frequency combining coefficients of each space-frequency vector pair.
其中,用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置具体是指,用来构建的预编码矩阵的空域向量在终端设备所上报的空域向量中的位置以及用来构建的预编码矩阵的频域向量在终端设备所上报的频域向量中的位置。由于每个空频向量对对应一个非零的空频合并系数(简称非零系数),故用来构建预编码矩阵的空频向量对的位置也就是非零系数的位置。The position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix specifically refers to the position of the space-domain vector of the precoding matrix used to construct the space-domain vector reported by the terminal device and the position of the frequency-domain vector of the precoding matrix used to construct the space-domain vector reported by the terminal device. Since each space-frequency vector pair corresponds to a non-zero space-frequency combining coefficient (referred to as a non-zero coefficient), the position of the space-frequency vector pair used to construct the precoding matrix is also the position of the non-zero coefficient.
应理解,上文所列举的各个空间层与空域向量、频域向量的关系仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the relationships between the various spatial layers and the spatial domain vectors and frequency domain vectors listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
还应理解,上文中所示的空频矩阵W与W1、W3的关系仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上述关系进行数学变换,得到其他用于表征空频矩阵W与W1、 W3的关系的计算式。例如,空频矩阵W也可以表示为在此情况下,W3中的每一个行向量可以对应一个被选择的频域向量。It should also be understood that the relationship between the space-frequency matrix W and W 1 , W 3 shown above is only an example and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformation on the above relationship to obtain other equations for characterizing the space-frequency matrix W and W 1 , For example, the space- frequency matrix W can also be expressed as In this case, each row vector in W 3 may correspond to a selected frequency domain vector.
由于双域压缩在空域和频域都分别进行了压缩,终端设备在反馈时,可以将选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量反馈给网络设备,而不再需要基于每个频域单元分别反馈空频合并系数。因此,双域压缩可以减小反馈开销。同时,由于频域向量能够表示信道在频率的变化规律,因此,通过一个或多个频域向量的线性叠加来模拟信道在频域上的变化,能够保持较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈恢复出来的预编码矩阵仍然能够较好地与信道适配。Since dual-domain compression compresses both the spatial domain and the frequency domain, the terminal device can feed back one or more selected spatial domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device when giving feedback, and no longer needs to feed back the spatial-frequency combining coefficients based on each frequency domain unit. Therefore, dual-domain compression can reduce feedback overhead. At the same time, since the frequency domain vector can represent the frequency variation law of the channel, the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the variation of the channel in the frequency domain, which can maintain a high feedback accuracy, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be well adapted to the channel.
应理解,上文中为了便于理解双域压缩,分别介绍了空频矩阵、空频向量对等术语,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备确定PMI的具体过程为终端设备的内部实现行为,本申请对于终端设备确定PMI的具体过程并不作限定。网络设备根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的具体过程为网络设备的内部实现行为,本申请对于网络设备根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的具体过程也不作限定。It should be understood that in order to facilitate the understanding of dual-domain compression, the above text introduces the terms space-frequency matrix, space-frequency vector, etc., but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The specific process of the terminal device determining the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the terminal device, and this application does not limit the specific process of the terminal device determining the PMI. The specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix based on the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the network device, and this application does not limit the specific process of the network device determining the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
作为一个可选的示例,终端设备可以通过PMI向网络设备上报如下信息:As an optional example, the terminal device may report the following information to the network device through the PMI:
每个空间层对应的W1矩阵包含的空域向量的索引;The index of the spatial domain vector contained in the W1 matrix corresponding to each spatial layer;
每个空间层对应的W3矩阵包含的频域向量的索引。The W3 matrix corresponding to each spatial layer contains the indices of the frequency domain vectors.
上述空域向量的索引和频域向量的索引可以称为码本索引,网络设备基于码本索引从码本中确定对应的空域向量和频域向量,以恢复信道矩阵或预编码矩阵。The index of the spatial domain vector and the index of the frequency domain vector may be referred to as a codebook index. The network device determines the corresponding spatial domain vector and frequency domain vector from the codebook based on the codebook index to restore the channel matrix or the precoding matrix.
16、远场信道模型与近场信道模型。16. Far-field channel model and near-field channel model.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种远场信道模型的示意图。远场信道模型中,天线阵列中各天线振子到最近的散射体的距离近似相同,电磁波的传播满足平面波规律,因此,远场信道模型需要考虑多径角度这个参数,但不需要考虑天线振子到散射体的距离。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of a far-field channel model provided by an embodiment of the present application. In the far-field channel model, the distances from each antenna element in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer are approximately the same, and the propagation of electromagnetic waves satisfies the plane wave law. Therefore, the far-field channel model needs to consider the multipath angle parameter, but does not need to consider the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种近场信道模型的示意图。近场信道模型中,天线阵列中各天线振子到最近的散射体的距离差异较大,电磁波的传播满足球面波规律,因此,近场信道模型除了需要考虑多径角度这个参数,还需要考虑天线振子到散射体的距离。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a near-field channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application. In the near-field channel model, the distances from each antenna element in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer vary greatly, and the propagation of electromagnetic waves satisfies the law of spherical waves. Therefore, in addition to considering the multipath angle parameter, the near-field channel model also needs to consider the distance from the antenna element to the scatterer.
随着大规模天线阵列的发展,网络设备的天线阵列的面积进一步增长,在载波频率不变的情况下,瑞利距离会随着天线阵列的面积增长呈指数型增长。With the development of large-scale antenna arrays, the area of antenna arrays of network equipment has further increased. When the carrier frequency remains unchanged, the Rayleigh distance will increase exponentially with the increase of the area of the antenna array.
瑞利距离的定义为 The Rayleigh distance is defined as
其中,r为瑞利距离,D是天线阵列的面积,λ是电磁波的波长。Where r is the Rayleigh distance, D is the area of the antenna array, and λ is the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave.
随着瑞利距离的增加,终端设备更容易处于符合球面波规律的区域。由于球面波前的存在,不同位置的信号相位发生畸变,使得传统码本的失配风险提高。As the Rayleigh distance increases, the terminal device is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of the spherical wavefront, the signal phase at different locations is distorted, which increases the mismatch risk of the traditional codebook.
例如,传统码本包括频域-角度双域压缩码本、频域-角度互易性码本、以及在时间上进一步压缩的频域-角度双域压缩码本,这些码本均未考虑距离维度,基于传统码本确定的空域位置与终端设备的实际位置不匹配,导致信道估计的准确度下降。For example, traditional codebooks include frequency-domain-angle dual-domain compression codebooks, frequency-domain-angle reciprocity codebooks, and frequency-domain-angle dual-domain compression codebooks that are further compressed in time. These codebooks do not consider the distance dimension. The spatial position determined based on the traditional codebook does not match the actual position of the terminal device, resulting in a decrease in the accuracy of channel estimation.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。如图5所示,方法500包括:The following describes a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG5 , the method 500 includes:
S510,终端设备110确定第一空域基底,第一空域基底属于空域基底集合,空域基底集合包括多个空域基底,多个空域基底中的每一个空域基底由网络设备120的天线阵列与第一物体之间的一条多径的角度和距离确定。S510, the terminal device 110 determines a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device 120 and the first object.
第一空域基底和空域基底集合的部分特征可以参见上文中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Some features of the first spatial basis and the spatial basis set can be found in the relevant description above and will not be repeated here.
网络设备120的天线阵列中,各个天线可以是支持左旋圆极化或右旋圆极化切换的天线,也可以是同时支持左旋圆极化和右旋圆极化的天线,还可以是支持线极化的天线。本申请实施例对天线阵列的具体类型不做限定。例如,天线阵列中的天线可以是端射圆极化天线、端射线极化天线、边射圆极化天线或者边射线极化天线。天线阵列中的各个天线可以相同,也可以不同。In the antenna array of the network device 120, each antenna may be an antenna that supports switching between left-hand circular polarization or right-hand circular polarization, or an antenna that supports both left-hand circular polarization and right-hand circular polarization, or an antenna that supports linear polarization. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific type of the antenna array. For example, the antenna in the antenna array may be an end-fire circular polarization antenna, an end-ray polarization antenna, an edge-fire circular polarization antenna, or an edge-ray polarization antenna. The antennas in the antenna array may be the same or different.
第一物体是离天线阵列最近的散射体(scatterer)。如果终端设备110与网络设备120之间的多径是视距(line-of-sight,LoS)径,则第一物体是终端设备110。如果终端设备110与网络设备120之间的多径是非视距(non-LoS)径,则第一物体是距天线阵列最近的散射体。散射体可以是指环境中的建筑物、地形、植被等现实世界中存在的任意物体。The first object is the scatterer closest to the antenna array. If the multipath between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is a line-of-sight (LoS) path, the first object is the terminal device 110. If the multipath between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 is a non-line-of-sight (non-LoS) path, the first object is the scatterer closest to the antenna array. Scatterers can refer to any object in the real world, such as buildings, terrain, and vegetation in the environment.
空域基底集合中,不同的空域基底对应不同的多径。In the spatial basis set, different spatial basis correspond to different multipaths.
确定第一空域基底前,终端设备110需要确定距离候选值集合,然后根据距离候选值集合确定空域 基底集合,下面介绍终端设备110确定距离候选值集合的方法示例。Before determining the first spatial domain basis, the terminal device 110 needs to determine a distance candidate value set, and then determine the spatial domain according to the distance candidate value set. Basis set. The following describes an example of a method for the terminal device 110 to determine a distance candidate value set.
确定距离候选值集合的方法一。Method 1 for determining a set of candidate distance values.
终端设备110确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及终端设备110与天线阵列之间的距离的量化比特数Δd;根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合。The terminal device 110 determines a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a quantization bit number Δd of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array; and determines a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd.
rmax和rmin可以是基于天线阵列与终端设备110之间的信号的TA确定的。其中,终端设备110可以自己计算TA,也可以从网络设备120接收TA,终端设备110还可以直接从网络设备120接收rmax和rmin。r max and r min may be determined based on the TA of the signal between the antenna array and the terminal device 110 . The terminal device 110 may calculate the TA itself or receive the TA from the network device 120 . The terminal device 110 may also directly receive r max and r min from the network device 120 .
例如,终端设备110从网络设备120接收第一信号,确定第一信号的TA,第一信号的TA存在一个误差范围,基于该误差范围的上限和下限可以确定rmax和rmin。For example, the terminal device 110 receives a first signal from the network device 120 and determines the TA of the first signal. The TA of the first signal has an error range, and r max and r min can be determined based on the upper limit and the lower limit of the error range.
例如,网络设备120从终端设备110接收第一信号,确定第一信号的TA,第一信号的TA存在一个误差范围,网络设备120将该误差范围告知终端设备110,终端设备110基于该误差范围的上限和下限可以确定rmax和rmin。For example, the network device 120 receives a first signal from the terminal device 110 and determines the TA of the first signal. The TA of the first signal has an error range. The network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the error range. The terminal device 110 can determine r max and r min based on the upper and lower limits of the error range.
例如,网络设备120从终端设备110接收第一信号,确定第一信号的TA,第一信号的TA存在一个误差范围,基于该误差范围的上限和下限可以确定rmax和rmin,随后,网络设备120将rmax和rmin告知终端设备110。For example, the network device 120 receives a first signal from the terminal device 110 and determines the TA of the first signal. The TA of the first signal has an error range. r max and r min can be determined based on the upper and lower limits of the error range. Then, the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of r max and r min .
可选地,终端设备110根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合时,可以根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,其中,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍。Optionally, when the terminal device 110 determines the distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd, the distance interval d gap may be determined according to r max , r min and Δd; the distance candidate value set is determined according to r max , r min and d gap , wherein the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
可选地,其中,dgap可以从网络设备120获取。Optionally, The d gap may be obtained from the network device 120 .
距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍,表示距离候选值集合中相邻的两个距离候选值的间隔相等。The difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap , which means that the intervals between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set are equal.
例如,距离候选值集合r可以是{rmin,rmin+dgap,rmin+2dgap,…,rmax},其中,rmin和rmin+dgap是两个相邻的距离候选值,rmin+dgap和rmin+2dgap是两个相邻的距离候选值。For example, the distance candidate value set r may be {r min , r min +d gap , r min +2d gap , . . . , r max }, where r min and r min +d gap are two adjacent distance candidate values, and r min +d gap and r min +2d gap are two adjacent distance candidate values.
确定距离候选值集合的方法二。Method 2 for determining a set of distance candidate values.
确定终端设备110与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中相邻两个距离候选值的差值为dgap,dgap与终端设备110与天线阵列之间的距离存在关联关系。Determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , wherein the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array.
确定距离候选值集合的方法二中,终端设备110确定rmax和rmin的方法与确定距离候选值集合的方法一中确定rmax和rmin的方法相同,不再赘述。In the second method for determining the distance candidate value set, the method for the terminal device 110 to determine r max and r min is the same as the method for determining r max and r min in the first method for determining the distance candidate value set, and will not be repeated herein.
终端设备110可以从网络设备120获取dgap。The terminal device 110 may obtain d gap from the network device 120 .
例如,网络设备120可以向终端设备110发送不同距离对应的dgap,终端设备110收到不同距离对应的dgap后,根据rmin确定对应的间隔dgap1,然后计算rmin与dgap1的和,得到rmin+dgap1;然后终端设备110根据rmin+dgap1对应的间隔dgap2,然后计算rmin+dgap1与dgap2的和,得到rmin+dgap1+dgap2;以此类推,直到计算出的最接近rmax的距离候选值rmin+dgap1+dgap2+…+dgapn为止,得到距离候选值集合r,r可以是{rmin,rmin+dgap1,rmin+dgap1+dgap2,…,rmin+dgap1+dgap2+…+dgapn,rmax}。For example, the network device 120 may send d gaps corresponding to different distances to the terminal device 110. After receiving the d gaps corresponding to different distances, the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap1 according to r min , and then calculates the sum of r min and d gap1 to obtain r min + d gap1 ; then the terminal device 110 calculates the sum of r min + d gap1 and d gap2 according to the interval d gap2 corresponding to r min + d gap1 , and obtains r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ; and so on, until the distance candidate value r min + d gap1 + d gap2 +…+ d gapn closest to r max is calculated, and a distance candidate value set r is obtained, where r may be {r min , r min + d gap1 , r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ,…, r min + d gap1 + d gap2 +…+ d gapn , r max }.
又例如,网络设备120可以向终端设备110发送dgap随距离变化的函数(或者说“变化关系”)。终端设备110收到该函数后,根据rmin和该函数确定对应的间隔dgap1,然后计算rmin与dgap1的和,得到rmin+dgap1;然后终端设备110根据rmin+dgap1和该函数确定对应的间隔dgap2,然后计算rmin+dgap1与dgap2的和,得到rmin+dgap1+dgap2;以此类推,直到计算出的最接近rmax的距离候选值rmin+dgap1+dgap2+…+dgapn为止,得到距离候选值集合r,r可以是{rmin,rmin+dgap1,rmin+dgap1+dgap2,…,rmin+dgap1+dgap2+…+dgapn,rmax}。For another example, the network device 120 may send a function (or "variation relationship") of d gap varying with distance to the terminal device 110. After receiving the function, the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap1 according to r min and the function, and then calculates the sum of r min and d gap1 to obtain r min + d gap1 ; then the terminal device 110 determines the corresponding interval d gap2 according to r min + d gap1 and the function, and then calculates the sum of r min + d gap1 and d gap2 to obtain r min + d gap1 + d gap2 ; and so on, until the calculated distance candidate value r min + d gap1 + d gap2 + ... + d gapn closest to r max is obtained, and a distance candidate value set r is obtained, where r may be {r min , r min + d gap1 , r min + d gap1 + d gap2 , ..., r min + d gap1 + d gap2 + ... + d gapn , r max }.
基于确定距离候选值集合的方法二得到的距离候选值集合r中,相邻的两个距离候选值的间隔不同,即,dgap1与dgap2不同。In the distance candidate value set r obtained based on the second method for determining the distance candidate value set, the intervals between two adjacent distance candidate values are different, that is, d gap1 is different from d gap2 .
确定距离候选值集合之后,终端设备110可以确定角度候选值集合,并根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。After determining the distance candidate value set, the terminal device 110 may determine the angle candidate value set, and determine the spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
例如,终端设备110可以根据3GPP TS 38.214V16.4.0(2020-12)确定角度候选值集合。当天线阵列为面阵时,终端设备110可以根据公式(1)和公式(2)确定空域基底集合。
For example, the terminal device 110 may determine the angle candidate value set according to 3GPP TS 38.214 V16.4.0 (2020-12). When the antenna array is a planar array, the terminal device 110 may determine the spatial basis set according to formula (1) and formula (2).
公式(1)中,Ωi为天线阵列中第i个振子的角度距离融合参数,d为天线阵列中参考振子到最近的散射体的多径的距离(即,距离候选值集合中的值),为多径的角度(即,角度候选值集合中的值),ri为天线阵列中第i个振子的位置,为参考振子的位置,其中,第i个振子为天线阵列中的任意一个振子,参考振子可以是天线阵列的各个振子中到最近的散射体的距离最小的振子,i为正整数。In formula (1), Ω i is the angle distance fusion parameter of the i-th vibrator in the antenna array, d is the multipath distance from the reference vibrator in the antenna array to the nearest scatterer (i.e., the value in the distance candidate value set), is the multipath angle (i.e., the value in the angle candidate value set), ri is the position of the i-th element in the antenna array, is the position of the reference vibrator, where the i-th vibrator is any vibrator in the antenna array, the reference vibrator can be the vibrator with the shortest distance to the nearest scatterer among the vibrators in the antenna array, and i is a positive integer.
公式(2)中,ai为天线阵列中第i个振子的空域基底(也可以称为导向矢量),e为自然常数,j为虚部,f为载波频率,c为光速,n为第i个振子的列数,m为第i个振子的行数,dx为天线阵列中的振子在水平维度的间距,dy为天线阵列中的振子在垂直维度的间距,Ωx为Ωi在水平维度的分量,Ωy为Ωi在垂直维度的分量。dx和dy可以从网络设备120获取,也可以默认等于半波长。In formula (2), a i is the spatial basis (also called the steering vector) of the i-th oscillator in the antenna array, e is a natural constant, j is the imaginary part, f is the carrier frequency, c is the speed of light, n is the number of columns of the i-th oscillator, m is the number of rows of the i-th oscillator, d x is the spacing of the oscillators in the antenna array in the horizontal dimension, dy is the spacing of the oscillators in the antenna array in the vertical dimension, Ω x is the component of Ω i in the horizontal dimension, and Ω y is the component of Ω i in the vertical dimension. d x and d y can be obtained from the network device 120, or can be equal to half a wavelength by default.
终端设备110可以从网络设备120获取天线阵列在水平维度的振子数N1和垂直维度的振子数N2,计算各个振子的Ωi和ai,所有振子的Ωi构成的集合即角度基底集合,所有振子的ai构成的集合即空域基底集合。The terminal device 110 can obtain the number of vibrators N1 in the horizontal dimension and the number of vibrators N2 in the vertical dimension of the antenna array from the network device 120, calculate the Ωi and ai of each vibrator, the set consisting of the Ωi of all vibrators is the angle basis set, and the set consisting of the ai of all vibrators is the spatial basis set.
应理解,上述确定空域基底集合的方法是示例而非限定。终端设备110确定空域基底集合后,可以从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。It should be understood that the above method for determining the spatial basis set is an example rather than a limitation. After the terminal device 110 determines the spatial basis set, it can determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set.
可选地,可以将天线阵列划分为多个子阵列,终端设备110可以基于子阵列确定第一空域基底。Optionally, the antenna array may be divided into a plurality of sub-arrays, and the terminal device 110 may determine the first spatial basis based on the sub-arrays.
例如,可以将天线阵列划分为第一子阵列和第二子阵列,终端设备110确定第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmax、rmin和δ,其中,第一接收数据为来自第一子阵列的数据,第二接收数据为来自第二子阵列的数据,rmin为终端设备110与天线阵列的距离的最大值,rmin为终端设备110与天线阵列的距离的最小值,δ为第一子阵列与第二子阵列的间距;终端设备110通过字典学习处理第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmin、rmin和δ,得到第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底。For example, the antenna array may be divided into a first subarray and a second subarray, and the terminal device 110 determines first received data, second received data, r max , r min and δ, wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array, and δ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; the terminal device 110 processes the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and δ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray.
字典学习算法如下。The dictionary learning algorithm is as follows.
信道、字典和发送信号的关系如下所示:
h(x,y)=W(r)s;The relationship between channels, dictionaries, and sent signals is as follows:
h(x,y)=W(r)s;
其中,h(x,y)表示信道,W(r)表示用于信道估计的字典,即,角度基底集合和距离基底集合,s表示发送信号。Among them, h(x, y) represents the channel, W(r) represents the dictionary used for channel estimation , that is, the angle basis set and the distance basis set, and s represents the transmitted signal.
可以定义字典的维度为N*N,则,
W(r)=[bN(θ1,r1),bN(θ2,r2),…,bN(θN,rN)];The dimension of the dictionary can be defined as N*N, then,
W(r)=[b N (θ 1 ,r 1 ), b N (θ 2 ,r 2 ),…, b N (θ N ,r N )];
其中,bN表示导向矢量,θ1至θN表示N个子阵列到最近的散射体的多径角度的候选值,r1至rN表示N个子阵列到最近的散射体的多径距离的候选值。如图6所示,θ1表示第一子阵列到最近的散射体的多径角度的候选值,θ2表示第二子阵列到最近的散射体的多径角度的候选值,r1表示第一子阵列到最近的散射体的多径距离的候选值,r2表示第二子阵列到最近的散射体的多径距离的候选值,δ为第一子阵列和第二子阵列的间距。Wherein, bN represents the steering vector, θ1 to θN represent the candidate values of the multipath angles from the N subarrays to the nearest scatterer, and r1 to rN represent the candidate values of the multipath distances from the N subarrays to the nearest scatterer. As shown in FIG6, θ1 represents the candidate value of the multipath angle from the first subarray to the nearest scatterer, θ2 represents the candidate value of the multipath angle from the second subarray to the nearest scatterer, r1 represents the candidate value of the multipath distance from the first subarray to the nearest scatterer, r2 represents the candidate value of the multipath distance from the second subarray to the nearest scatterer, and δ represents the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray.
将天线阵列划分为第一子阵列和第二子阵列后,发送信号s也可以分为两部分,相应地,终端设备110接收到的两个信号分别为y1和y2,其中,y1即第一接收数据,y2即第二接收数据。After the antenna array is divided into the first subarray and the second subarray, the transmitted signal s can also be divided into two parts. Accordingly, the two signals received by the terminal device 110 are y1 and y2 , where y1 is the first received data and y2 is the second received data.
对于每条多径的每次迭代,有以下过程:For each iteration of each multipath, the following process occurs:
终端设备110利用rmax和所有角度计算初始的字典W1(r)和W2(r);The terminal device 110 calculates initial dictionaries W 1 (r) and W 2 (r) using r max and all angles;
根据W1(r)估计θ1,其中,为θ1的估计值;Estimate θ 1 based on W 1 (r), where is the estimated value of θ 1 ;
根据确定d1和d2,根据d1确定θmin,根据d2确定θmax;根据θmin和θmax从W2(r)中选择部分元
素作为子字典W2,sub(r),其中,
according to Determine d 1 and d 2 , determine θ min based on d 1 , and determine θ max based on d 2 ; select some elements from W 2 (r) based on θ min and θ max The element is used as a sub-dictionary W 2,sub (r), where
根据W2,sub(r)估计θ2,其中,为θ2的估计值;Estimate θ 2 based on W 2,sub (r), where is the estimated value of θ 2 ;
根据图6所示的几何关系,计算r1和r2,其中,According to the geometric relationship shown in Figure 6, r 1 and r 2 are calculated, where
为r1的估计值,为r2的估计值; is the estimated value of r 1 , is the estimated value of r 2 ;
根据更新W1(r)的列,根据更新W2(r)的列。according to Update the columns of W 1 (r) according to Update the columns of W 2 (r).
重复上述步骤,直到迭代终止,得到更新后的W1(r)和更新后的W2(r),根据更新后的W1(r)和更新后的W2(r)计算多径的时延、角度、和距离等参数。Repeat the above steps until the iteration is terminated to obtain updated W 1 (r) and updated W 2 (r), and calculate multipath parameters such as delay, angle, and distance based on the updated W 1 (r) and updated W 2 (r).
通过字典学习可以得到第一子阵列估计的多径的时延、多径的角度、多径的距离、和组合系数,以及,第二子阵列估计的多径的时延、多径的角度、多径的距离、和组合系数。基于多径的角度和多径的距离可以计算空域基底(包括距离基底和角度基底)和频域基底。Through dictionary learning, the multipath delay, multipath angle, multipath distance, and combination coefficient estimated by the first subarray, as well as the multipath delay, multipath angle, multipath distance, and combination coefficient estimated by the second subarray can be obtained. Based on the multipath angle and multipath distance, the spatial domain basis (including the distance basis and the angle basis) and the frequency domain basis can be calculated.
需要说明的是,每个子阵列至少包括1个振子,各个子阵列包括的振子的数量可以相同,也可以不同。It should be noted that each sub-array includes at least one vibrator, and the number of vibrators included in each sub-array may be the same or different.
终端设备110确定第一子阵列的角度基底和距离基底,以及第二子阵列的角度基底和距离基底后,可以通过以下多种方式上报:After the terminal device 110 determines the angle basis and the distance basis of the first subarray, and the angle basis and the distance basis of the second subarray, it can report them in the following ways:
上报方式一:τ、r1、θ1和α1。Reporting method 1: τ, r 1 , θ 1 and α 1 .
上报方式二:τ、r2、θ2和α2。Reporting method 2: τ, r 2 , θ 2 and α 2 .
上报方式三:τ、r1、θ1、α1和α2。Reporting method three: τ, r 1 , θ 1 , α 1 and α 2 .
上报方式四:τ、r2、θ2、α1和α2。Reporting method four: τ, r 2 , θ 2 , α 1 and α 2 .
上报方式五:τ、r1、θ1、r2、θ2、α1和α2。Reporting method five: τ, r 1 , θ 1 , r 2 , θ 2 , α 1 and α 2 .
τ为第一子阵列和第二子阵列共享的频域基底的索引,r1为第一子阵列的距离基底的索引,r2为第二子阵列的距离基底的索引,θ1为第一子阵列的角度基底的索引,θ2为第二子阵列的角度基底的索引,α1为第一子阵列的组合系数,α2为第二子阵列的组合系数。τ is the index of the frequency domain basis shared by the first subarray and the second subarray, r1 is the index of the distance basis of the first subarray, r2 is the index of the distance basis of the second subarray, θ1 is the index of the angle basis of the first subarray, θ2 is the index of the angle basis of the second subarray, α1 is the combination coefficient of the first subarray, and α2 is the combination coefficient of the second subarray.
网络设备120可以根据图6所示的几何关系和第一子阵列的角度基底和距离基底推导第二子阵列的角度基底和距离基底,或者,网络设备120可以根据图6所示的几何关系和第二子阵列的角度基底和距离基底推导第一子阵列的角度基底和距离基底。因此,终端设备110可以通过上报方式一至上报方式四降低反馈开销。此外,如果认为同一个多径的组合系数相同的话,α1等于α2,终端设备110可以通过上报方式一和上报方式二进一步降低反馈开销;如果认为同一个多径的组合系数不相同的话,α1不等于α2,终端设备110可以采用上报方式三至上报方式五。The network device 120 can derive the angle basis and distance basis of the second subarray based on the geometric relationship shown in FIG6 and the angle basis and distance basis of the first subarray, or the network device 120 can derive the angle basis and distance basis of the first subarray based on the geometric relationship shown in FIG6 and the angle basis and distance basis of the second subarray. Therefore, the terminal device 110 can reduce the feedback overhead through reporting mode 1 to reporting mode 4. In addition, if it is believed that the combination coefficients of the same multipath are the same, α 1 is equal to α 2 , and the terminal device 110 can further reduce the feedback overhead through reporting mode 1 and reporting mode 2; if it is believed that the combination coefficients of the same multipath are different, α 1 is not equal to α 2 , and the terminal device 110 can adopt reporting mode 3 to reporting mode 5.
在基于字典学习确定空域基底的示例中,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;和/或,第二子阵列的角度基底,和,第二子阵列的距离基底。In the example of determining a spatial basis based on dictionary learning, the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; and/or an angle basis of the second subarray, and a distance basis of the second subarray.
将天线阵列划分为多个子阵列后,终端设备110可以分别估计不同子阵列的基底,最后将多个子阵列的PMI联合反馈给网络设备120,网络设备120可以根据多个子阵列之间的几何关系以及多个子阵列的PMI重构信道。由于终端设备110在估计一个子阵列的基底时需要处理的接收数据的数据量减少,字典学习过程进行距离和角度的循环嵌套的次数减小,从而降低了终端设备110进行信道估计的复杂度和功耗。After the antenna array is divided into multiple sub-arrays, the terminal device 110 can estimate the basis of different sub-arrays respectively, and finally jointly feed back the PMIs of the multiple sub-arrays to the network device 120, and the network device 120 can reconstruct the channel according to the geometric relationship between the multiple sub-arrays and the PMIs of the multiple sub-arrays. Since the amount of received data that the terminal device 110 needs to process when estimating the basis of a sub-array is reduced, the number of loop nestings of distance and angle in the dictionary learning process is reduced, thereby reducing the complexity and power consumption of the channel estimation of the terminal device 110.
终端设备110确定第一空域基底后,可以执行下列步骤。After the terminal device 110 determines the first spatial basis, it can perform the following steps.
S520,根据第一空域基底确定组合系数。S520: Determine a combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis.
终端设备110可以基于下述步骤1和步骤2确定组合系数。The terminal device 110 may determine the combination coefficient based on steps 1 and 2 described below.
步骤1:终端设备110对下行信道进行空频联合协方差矩阵统计,并进行极化间平均,得到对 进行SVD或者特征分解求得特征向量构成的矩阵对矩阵进行截断,选择能量较大的个特征值对应的列构成统计特征矩阵包含了信道的绝大部分能量(P可以由终端设备110自行决定,或者,网络设备120规定一个可选的范围然后由终端设备110从该范围内选择P)。Step 1: The terminal device 110 performs space-frequency joint covariance matrix statistics on the downlink channel and performs inter-polarization averaging to obtain right Perform SVD or eigendecomposition to obtain the matrix of eigenvectors Pair Matrix Cut off and select the one with larger energy The corresponding eigenvalues The columns constitute the statistical feature matrix Contains most of the energy of the channel (P can be determined by the terminal device 110 itself, or the network device 120 specifies an optional range and the terminal device 110 selects P from the range).
步骤2:终端设备110利用DFT码本对统计特征向量构成的统计特征矩阵进行近似,即,寻找Wf、Ws和W2,使得或者其中,Wf和Ws为过采样DFT矩阵的部分列构成的子矩阵,Wf表示频域基底,Ws表示空域基底(如,上文所述的第一空域基底);W2表示组合系数矩阵,为在空域压缩矩阵W1上的投影,因此,确定W2的过程即寻找可以将W1修正为的矩阵的过程。Step 2: The terminal device 110 uses the DFT codebook to construct a statistical feature matrix of the statistical feature vector Make an approximation, that is, find W f , W s and W 2 such that or Wherein, Wf and Ws are sub-matrices composed of some columns of the oversampled DFT matrix, Wf represents the frequency domain basis, Ws represents the spatial domain basis (such as the first spatial domain basis described above); W2 represents the combination coefficient matrix, which is The projection on the spatial compression matrix W 1 , therefore, the process of determining W 2 is to find a matrix that can correct W 1 to The process of the matrix.
步骤1和步骤2是示例而非限定,本申请对根据第一空域基底确定组合系数的方法不做限定。确定组合系数后,终端设备110可以执行下列步骤。Step 1 and step 2 are examples rather than limitations, and the present application does not limit the method for determining the combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis. After determining the combination coefficient, the terminal device 110 may perform the following steps.
S530,发送PMI,PMI包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数。S530, sending PMI, where the PMI includes an identifier and a combination coefficient of the first spatial basis.
相应地,网络设备120接收该PMI。Accordingly, network device 120 receives the PMI.
空域基底集合中各个空域基底都有对应的标识(也可以称为“索引”),终端设备110可以通过PMI将选择的一个或多个空域基底的索引上报给网络设备120,该一个或多个空域基底包括第一空域基底。Each spatial basis in the spatial basis set has a corresponding identifier (also called an "index"). The terminal device 110 can report the index of one or more selected spatial basis to the network device 120 through the PMI. The one or more spatial basis includes the first spatial basis.
可选地,第一空域基底的索引可以包括第一空域基底对应的角度基底的标识,和,第一空域基底对应的距离基底的标识。可选地,PMI还包括第一空域基底对应的角度基底的过采样率和第一空域基底对应的距离基底的过采样率。Optionally, the index of the first spatial basis may include an identifier of an angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis, and an identifier of a distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis. Optionally, the PMI also includes an oversampling rate of the angle basis corresponding to the first spatial basis and an oversampling rate of the distance basis corresponding to the first spatial basis.
W2中的元素是所有空域基底对应的组合系数,终端设备110可以从中选择全部或部分组合系数上报给网络设备120。例如,终端设备110可以通过PMI将全部组合系数中的非零系数和最强系数上报给网络设备120,其中,非零系数可以通过位图(bitmap)指示,该位图的比特数为2*L*D*M,L为空域基底集合中全部空域基底对应的角度基底的数量,D为空域基底集合中全部空域基底对应的距离基底的数量,M为全部频域基底的数量。The elements in W2 are the combination coefficients corresponding to all spatial bases, and the terminal device 110 can select all or part of the combination coefficients to report to the network device 120. For example, the terminal device 110 can report the non-zero coefficients and the strongest coefficients of all the combination coefficients to the network device 120 through the PMI, wherein the non-zero coefficients can be indicated by a bitmap, and the number of bits of the bitmap is 2*L*D*M, where L is the number of angle bases corresponding to all spatial bases in the spatial base set, D is the number of distance bases corresponding to all spatial bases in the spatial base set, and M is the number of all frequency domain bases.
比特数为2*L*D*M的位图能够适配包含角度基底、距离基底和频域基底的场景。距离基底的过采样率可用于扩展距离基底的数量,从而可以扩展空域基底集合中空域基底的数量,更大的空域基底集合有利于网络设备恢复出更接近终端设备确定的预编码矩阵的预编码矩阵,提高信道估计的准确度。A bitmap with a bit number of 2*L*D*M can adapt to scenarios including angle basis, distance basis and frequency domain basis. The oversampling rate of the distance basis can be used to expand the number of distance basis, thereby expanding the number of spatial basis in the spatial basis set. A larger spatial basis set is conducive to the network device to recover a precoding matrix that is closer to the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
可选地,PMI还包括其它信息,如非零系数的数量,RI、CQI、频域基底的索引、以及频域基底的过采样率等等。本申请实施例对PMI包含的信息不做限定。Optionally, the PMI also includes other information, such as the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, the index of the frequency domain basis, and the oversampling rate of the frequency domain basis, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the information included in the PMI.
网络设备120收到PMI后,可以执行下列步骤。After receiving the PMI, the network device 120 may perform the following steps.
S540,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。S540: Determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
S550,根据第一空域基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵。S550: Determine a precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficients.
网络设备120基于PMI中的空域基底索引从空域基底集合中确定一个或多个空域基底,该一个或多个空域基底包括第一空域基底,该一个或多个空域基底组成空域压缩矩阵W1。网络设备120基于PMI确定一个或多个组合系数,该一个或多个组合系数组成组合系数矩阵W2。网络设备120基于PMI中的频域基底索引从频域基底集合中确定一个或多个频域基底,该一个或多个频域基底组成频域压缩矩阵W3。The network device 120 determines one or more spatial basis from a spatial basis set based on the spatial basis index in the PMI, the one or more spatial basis includes a first spatial basis, and the one or more spatial basis constitutes a spatial compression matrix W 1 . The network device 120 determines one or more combination coefficients based on the PMI, and the one or more combination coefficients constitute a combination coefficient matrix W 2 . The network device 120 determines one or more frequency domain basis from a frequency domain basis set based on the frequency domain basis index in the PMI, and the one or more frequency domain basis constitutes a frequency domain compression matrix W 3 .
随后,网络设备120可以根据W1、W2、W3以及公式(3)所示的近场码本结构确定预编码矩阵W。
Subsequently, the network device 120 may determine the precoding matrix W according to W 1 , W 2 , W 3 and the near-field codebook structure shown in formula (3).
公式(3)中,其中,P是天线端口的数量,L是空域基底的数量,D是距离基底的数量,M是频域基底的数量,N3是频域单元的数量,预编码矩阵W的维度为P×N3。In formula (3), Where P is the number of antenna ports, L is the number of spatial basis, D is the number of distance basis, M is the number of frequency domain basis, N 3 is the number of frequency domain units, and the dimension of the precoding matrix W is P×N 3 .
需要说明的是,网络设备120在执行S540前已经确定了空域基底集合,网络设备120确定空域基底集合的方法可以参照终端设备110确定空域基底集合的方法,不再赘述。It should be noted that the network device 120 has determined the spatial basis set before executing S540. The method for the network device 120 to determine the spatial basis set can refer to the method for the terminal device 110 to determine the spatial basis set, which will not be repeated here.
随着瑞利距离的增加,终端设备110更容易处于符合球面波规律的区域。由于球面波前的存在,不同位置的信号相位发生畸变,因此,在进行预编码时需要考虑天线振子到散射体的距离,即,需要考虑多径的距离。方法500中,空域基底集合中每个空域基底同时考虑了多径的角度和距离,基于该空域基底集合设置的码本更加符合球面波规律。因此,终端设备110发送的包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系 数的PMI,能够使网络设备120确定的空域位置与终端设备的实际位置匹配,提高信道估计的准确度。As the Rayleigh distance increases, the terminal device 110 is more likely to be in an area that conforms to the law of spherical waves. Due to the existence of the spherical wavefront, the signal phase at different positions is distorted. Therefore, when performing precoding, it is necessary to consider the distance from the antenna vibrator to the scatterer, that is, the multipath distance. In method 500, each spatial basis in the spatial basis set considers the angle and distance of the multipath at the same time, and the codebook set based on the spatial basis set is more in line with the law of spherical waves. Therefore, the identifier and the combination system of the first spatial basis sent by the terminal device 110 The PMI of the number can match the spatial location determined by the network device 120 with the actual location of the terminal device, thereby improving the accuracy of channel estimation.
上文介绍了方法500的流程。The above describes the process of method 500 .
可选地,方法500中,终端设备110基于公式(1)和公式(2)反馈PMI的信令交互流程如图7所示。Optionally, in method 500, the signaling interaction process of the terminal device 110 feeding back the PMI based on formula (1) and formula (2) is shown in FIG. 7 .
S710,网络设备120向终端设备110发送反馈PMI所需的参数。S710 , the network device 120 sends parameters required for feedback of the PMI to the terminal device 110 .
反馈PMI所需的参数例如包括:rmax、rmin、Δd、N1和N2。反馈PMI所需的参数还可以包括其它参数,例如,天线阵列中的振子在水平维度的间距和天线阵列中的振子在垂直维度的间距,这里不做限定。The parameters required for PMI feedback include, for example, r max , r min , Δd, N 1 and N 2 . The parameters required for PMI feedback may also include other parameters, such as the horizontal spacing of the elements in the antenna array and the vertical spacing of the elements in the antenna array, which are not limited here.
S720,终端设备110根据反馈PMI所需的参数确定空域基底、频域基底和组合系数。S720, the terminal device 110 determines a spatial domain basis, a frequency domain basis and a combination coefficient according to the parameters required for feedback of the PMI.
根据rmax、rmin、Δd、N1和N2确定空域基底和组合系数的方法如上文所述,确定频域基底的方法可以参照现有技术中的相关方法,这里不再赘述。The method for determining the spatial domain basis and the combination coefficient according to r max , r min , Δd, N 1 and N 2 is as described above, and the method for determining the frequency domain basis can refer to the relevant method in the prior art, which will not be described again here.
S730,终端设备110向网络设备120发送PMI。S730 , the terminal device 110 sends the PMI to the network device 120 .
该PMI包括空域基底的索引、频域基底的索引和组合系数。该PMI还可以包括非零系数的数量、RI、CQI、以及频域基底的过采样率等等。本申请实施例对PMI包含的信息不做限定。The PMI includes the index of the spatial domain basis, the index of the frequency domain basis and the combination coefficient. The PMI may also include the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, and the oversampling rate of the frequency domain basis, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the information contained in the PMI.
S740,网络设备120根据PMI确定预编码矩阵。S740: The network device 120 determines a precoding matrix according to the PMI.
根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的方法如S550所述,这里不再赘述。The method for determining the precoding matrix according to the PMI is as described in S550 and will not be repeated here.
可选地,方法500中,终端设备110基于多个子阵列反馈PMI的信令交互流程如图8所示。Optionally, in method 500, a signaling interaction process of the terminal device 110 feeding back PMI based on multiple sub-arrays is as shown in FIG8 .
S810,网络设备120向终端设备110发送反馈PMI所需的参数。S810 , the network device 120 sends parameters required for feedback of the PMI to the terminal device 110 .
反馈PMI所需的参数例如包括:rmax、rmin、以及各个子阵列的间距(如,δ)。反馈PMI所需的参数还可以包括其它参数,例如,各个子阵列的振子数,这里不做限定。The parameters required for feeding back the PMI include, for example, r max , r min , and the spacing of each subarray (eg, δ). The parameters required for feeding back the PMI may also include other parameters, for example, the number of transducers of each subarray, which is not limited here.
S820,终端设备110根据反馈PMI所需的参数确定空域基底、频域基底和组合系数。S820, the terminal device 110 determines a spatial domain basis, a frequency domain basis and a combination coefficient according to the parameters required for feedback of the PMI.
终端设备110可以根据上文所述的字典学习算法以及反馈PMI所需的参数确定空域基底、频域基底和组合系数。The terminal device 110 may determine the spatial domain basis, the frequency domain basis and the combination coefficient according to the dictionary learning algorithm described above and the parameters required for feeding back the PMI.
例如,终端设备110通过字典学习处理第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmin、rmin和δ,得到第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底。For example, the terminal device 110 processes the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and δ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray.
S830,终端设备110向网络设备120发送PMI。S830 , the terminal device 110 sends the PMI to the network device 120 .
该PMI包括一个或多个子阵列的空域基底的索引、频域基底的索引和组合系数。该PMI还可以包括非零系数的数量、RI、CQI、以及频域基底的过采样率等等。本申请实施例对PMI包含的信息不做限定。The PMI includes the index of the spatial basis of one or more subarrays, the index of the frequency basis and the combination coefficient. The PMI may also include the number of non-zero coefficients, RI, CQI, and the oversampling rate of the frequency basis, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the information contained in the PMI.
S840,网络设备120根据PMI确定预编码矩阵。S840: The network device 120 determines a precoding matrix according to the PMI.
根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的方法如S550所述,这里不再赘述。The method for determining the precoding matrix according to the PMI is as described in S550 and will not be repeated here.
上文详细介绍了近场信道模型的场景中确定预编码矩阵的方法。可选地,终端设备110和网络设备120可以在执行方法500前确定当前场景适用近场信道模型还是远场信道模型。终端设备110可以通过下列两种方法确定当前场景适用的信道模型。The above describes in detail the method for determining the precoding matrix in the scenario of the near-field channel model. Optionally, the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 may determine whether the near-field channel model or the far-field channel model is applicable to the current scenario before executing the method 500. The terminal device 110 may determine the channel model applicable to the current scenario by the following two methods.
确定目标信道模型的方法一。Method 1 for determining a target channel model.
确定终端设备110与天线阵列之间的距离dTA;根据dTA确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Determine a distance d TA between the terminal device 110 and the antenna array; determine a target channel model according to d TA , where the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine a first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis.
第一信道模型即近场信道模型,第二信道模型即远场信道模型。终端设备110可以确定第一信号的TA,根据第一信号的TA确定dTA。The first channel model is a near-field channel model, and the second channel model is a far-field channel model. The terminal device 110 may determine the TA of the first signal, and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
TA是用来维护上行时间同步的参数。终端设备110要与网络设备120进行通信,需要进行上行时间同步和下行时间同步。终端设备110开机后会进行小区搜索,通过小区广播的主同步信号和辅同步信号获得下行时间同步。任何上行信号都可以作为物理层进行上行定时测量的输入,例如,物理层进行上行定时测量所使用的上行信号可以是:随机接入(random access,RA)前导码(preamble)、SRS、DMRS和物理上行链路控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)。TA is a parameter used to maintain uplink time synchronization. For the terminal device 110 to communicate with the network device 120, uplink time synchronization and downlink time synchronization are required. After the terminal device 110 is turned on, it will search for a cell and obtain downlink time synchronization through the primary synchronization signal and the secondary synchronization signal broadcast by the cell. Any uplink signal can be used as an input for the physical layer to perform uplink timing measurement. For example, the uplink signal used by the physical layer for uplink timing measurement can be: random access (RA) preamble, SRS, DMRS and physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
在终端设备110进行随机接入时,物理层会根据RA前导码测量得到上行定时值,并将测量得到的TA上报给L2;在终端设备110随机接入成功后的定时维护则可以通过SRS或PUCCH来进行,当存在上行数据传输时也可以用DMRS来获得上行定时测量偏移值。When the terminal device 110 performs random access, the physical layer will obtain the uplink timing value based on the RA preamble code measurement, and report the measured TA to L2; the timing maintenance after the terminal device 110 successfully performs random access can be performed through SRS or PUCCH, and when there is uplink data transmission, DMRS can also be used to obtain the uplink timing measurement offset value.
TA可以反映网络设备120与终端设备110之间得距离,根据TA计算距离dTA的方法如下: dTA=TA*c/2,c是光速。TA can reflect the distance between the network device 120 and the terminal device 110. The method for calculating the distance d TA according to TA is as follows: dTA =TA*c/2, c is the speed of light.
网络设备120可以通过测量第一信号获得TA,通过第一指示信息将该TA发送给终端设备110。可选地,当终端设备110与网络设备120之间的多个信号包括随机接入前导码(random access preamble)、SRS和DMRS时,第一信号可以是SRS;或者,当终端设备110与网络设备120之间的多个信号包括随机接入前导码和DMRS时,第一信号可以是DMRS。The network device 120 may obtain the TA by measuring the first signal, and send the TA to the terminal device 110 through the first indication information. Optionally, when the multiple signals between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 include a random access preamble, an SRS, and a DMRS, the first signal may be an SRS; or, when the multiple signals between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 include a random access preamble and a DMRS, the first signal may be a DMRS.
通过SRS测得的TA比通过DMRS或随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,通过DMRS测得的TA比通过随机接入前导码测得的TA更精确,因此,基于上述优先级选择第一信号,可以获得更加精确的TA,从而使基于TA确定的目标信道模型更加精确。The TA measured by SRS is more accurate than the TA measured by DMRS or random access preamble code, and the TA measured by DMRS is more accurate than the TA measured by random access preamble code. Therefore, by selecting the first signal based on the above priority, a more accurate TA can be obtained, thereby making the target channel model determined based on TA more accurate.
网络设备120还可以测量多个信号得到多个TA,将该多个TA发送给终端设备110,并通过第一指示信息其中的一个TA。终端设备110根据第一指示信息指示的TA计算dTA。The network device 120 may also measure multiple signals to obtain multiple TAs, send the multiple TAs to the terminal device 110, and use one of the TAs in the first indication information. The terminal device 110 calculates d TA according to the TA indicated by the first indication information.
网络设备120也可以计算出dTA,将dTA发送给终端设备110。The network device 120 may also calculate d TA and send d TA to the terminal device 110 .
在根据dTA确定目标信道模型前,终端设备110还可以确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离,其中,dFF=2D2/λ,D是天线阵列的面积,λ是电磁波的波长。网络设备120计算dFF后将dFF发送给终端设备110。随后,终端设备110可以根据dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值确定目标信道模型,或者,终端设备110可以根据dTA与dFF的比值确定目标信道模型。Before determining the target channel model according to d TA , the terminal device 110 may also determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model, wherein d FF = 2D 2 /λ, D is the area of the antenna array, and λ is the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave. After calculating d FF , the network device 120 sends d FF to the terminal device 110. Subsequently, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF , or the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF .
又例如,若|dTA-dFF|<第一距离阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若|dTA-dFF|>第二距离阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一距离阈值小于或等于第二距离阈值,第一距离阈值和第二距离阈值可以从网络设备120获取。For another example, if |d TA -d FF |<first distance threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if |d TA -d FF |>second distance threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold, and the first distance threshold and the second distance threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
例如,若dTA/dFF<第三距离阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA/dFF>第四距离阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三距离阈值小于或等于第四距离阈值,第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值可以从网络设备120获取。For example, if d TA /d FF < the third distance threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if d TA /d FF > the fourth distance threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold, and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
终端设备110确定目标信道模型后,可以通过第三指示信息将目标信道模型告知网络设备120,以便于网络设备120基于目标信道模型重构更加准确的预编码矩阵。After the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device 120 of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device 120 can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
可选地,网络设备120可以根据dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值或者根据dTA与dFF的比值确定目标信道模型,随后,网络设备120通过第四指示信息将目标信道模型告知终端设备110。终端设备110无需通过本地计算确定目标信道模型,从而降低了终端设备110确定目标信道模型的功耗。Optionally, the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF or according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and then the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model through fourth indication information. The terminal device 110 does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device 110 in determining the target channel model.
上文介绍了终端设备110和网络设备120确定目标信道模型的方法。The above describes the method for the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 to determine the target channel model.
可选地,终端设备110根据dTA确定目标信道模型的方法的信令交互流程如图9所示。Optionally, the signaling interaction process of the method in which the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model according to dTA is shown in FIG9 .
S910,终端设备110向网络设备120发送第一信号。S910, the terminal device 110 sends a first signal to the network device 120.
第一信号可以是上文所述的随机接入前导码、SRS和DMRS中的至少一个。第一信号还可以是其它能够测量TA的上行信号,如PUCCH。The first signal may be at least one of the random access preamble, SRS and DMRS mentioned above. The first signal may also be other uplink signals capable of measuring TA, such as PUCCH.
S920,网络设备120通过第一信号测量TA。S920, the network device 120 measures TA through the first signal.
S930,网络设备120向终端设备110发送TA。S930 , the network device 120 sends a TA to the terminal device 110 .
如果网络设备120测得多个信号的TA,网络设备120可以在发送TA时将多个信号的TA的优先级发给终端设备110。可选地,该优先级也可以是预设的优先级。可选地,网络设备120可以不发送优先级,而是直接指示终端设备110使用多个信号的TA中的某一个TA,例如,通过第一指示信息指示第一信号的TA,其中,第一指示信息可以是一个2比特的字段;第一指示信息为00可以指示随机接入前导码的TA,第一指示信息为01可以指示SRS的TA,第一指示信息为10可以指示DMRS的TA,第一指示信息为11可以指示PUCCH的TA。If the network device 120 measures the TAs of multiple signals, the network device 120 may send the priorities of the TAs of the multiple signals to the terminal device 110 when sending the TAs. Optionally, the priority may also be a preset priority. Optionally, the network device 120 may not send the priority, but directly instruct the terminal device 110 to use one of the TAs of the multiple signals, for example, by indicating the TA of the first signal through the first indication information, wherein the first indication information may be a 2-bit field; the first indication information of 00 may indicate the TA of the random access preamble, the first indication information of 01 may indicate the TA of the SRS, the first indication information of 10 may indicate the TA of the DMRS, and the first indication information of 11 may indicate the TA of the PUCCH.
S940,终端设备110根据TA确定dTA。S940, the terminal device 110 determines d TA according to the TA.
终端设备110可以根据优先级或者网络设备120的指示确定一个TA,根据该TA计算dTA。The terminal device 110 may determine a TA according to the priority or the instruction of the network device 120 , and calculate d TA according to the TA.
S950,网络设备120向终端设备110发送dFF和距离阈值。S950 , the network device 120 sends d FF and a distance threshold to the terminal device 110 .
该距离阈值可以是:The distance threshold can be:
第一距离阈值,和,第二距离阈值;和/或,a first distance threshold, and a second distance threshold; and/or
第三距离阈值,和,第四距离阈值。a third distance threshold, and, a fourth distance threshold.
若第一距离阈值与第二距离阈值相等,网络设备120可以只发其中的一个;若第三距离阈值与第四距离阈值相等,网络设备120可以只发其中的一个。dFF和距离阈值可以承载于一条消息,也可以承载于 多条消息中。本申请实施例对承载dFF和距离阈值的具体消息不做限定。If the first distance threshold is equal to the second distance threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them; if the third distance threshold is equal to the fourth distance threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific message that carries the d FF and the distance threshold.
S950可以在S960之前的任一时刻执行,例如,可以在S930之前执行,也可以在S930之后执行,还可以与S930同时执行,即,网络设备120通过一条消息将TA、dFF和距离阈值发送给终端设备110。S950 may be executed at any time before S960, for example, before S930, after S930, or simultaneously with S930, that is, the network device 120 sends TA, d FF , and distance threshold to the terminal device 110 through one message.
可选地,距离阈值可以是预设的,如协议规定的值,或者厂商配置的值。在这种情况下,网络设备120不再发送距离阈值。Optionally, the distance threshold may be preset, such as a value specified by a protocol, or a value configured by a manufacturer. In this case, the network device 120 no longer sends the distance threshold.
S960,终端设备110根据dTA、dFF和距离阈值确定目标信道模型。S960: The terminal device 110 determines a target channel model according to d TA , d FF and a distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第一距离阈值和第二距离阈值,终端设备110可以根据dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值、以及第一距离阈值和第二距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a first distance threshold and a second distance threshold, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF and the first distance threshold and the second distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值,终端设备110可以根据dTA与dFF的比值、以及第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a third distance threshold and a fourth distance threshold, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第一距离阈值、第二距离阈值、第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值,则终端设备110可以自行决定使用哪些距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a first distance threshold, a second distance threshold, a third distance threshold and a fourth distance threshold, the terminal device 110 can decide which distance thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
S970,终端设备110向网络设备120指示目标信道模型。S970 , the terminal device 110 indicates the target channel model to the network device 120 .
例如,终端设备110可以通过第三指示信息向网络设备120指示目标信道模型,其中,第三指示信息可以是一个1比特的字段;第三指示信息为0可以指示目标信道模型是第一信道模型,第三指示信息为1可以指示目标信道模型是第二信道模型。For example, the terminal device 110 can indicate the target channel model to the network device 120 through the third indication information, wherein the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
可选地,网络设备120根据dTA确定目标信道模型的方法的信令交互流程如图10所示。Optionally, the signaling interaction flow of the method in which the network device 120 determines the target channel model according to dTA is shown in FIG10 .
S1010,终端设备110向网络设备120发送第一信号。S1010, the terminal device 110 sends a first signal to the network device 120.
第一信号可以是上文所述的随机接入前导码、SRS和DMRS中的至少一个。第一信号还可以是其它能够测量TA的上行信号,如PUCCH。The first signal may be at least one of the random access preamble, SRS and DMRS mentioned above. The first signal may also be other uplink signals capable of measuring TA, such as PUCCH.
S1020,网络设备120通过第一信号测量TA。S1020, the network device 120 measures TA through the first signal.
S1030,网络设备120根据TA确定dTA。S1030: The network device 120 determines d TA according to the TA.
若第一信号包括多个信号,网络设备120可以自行确定使用哪个信号的TA确定dTA,例如,网络设备120可以根据随机接入前导码、SRS和DMRS的优先级确定使用SRS的TA确定dTA。If the first signal includes multiple signals, the network device 120 may determine which signal's TA to use to determine d TA . For example, the network device 120 may determine the TA to use the SRS to determine d TA according to the priorities of the random access preamble, SRS, and DMRS.
S1040,网络设备120根据dTA、dFF和距离阈值确定目标信道模型。S1040: The network device 120 determines a target channel model according to d TA , d FF and a distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第一距离阈值和第二距离阈值,网络设备120可以根据dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值、以及第一距离阈值和第二距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a first distance threshold and a second distance threshold, the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF and the first distance threshold and the second distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值,网络设备120可以根据dTA与dFF的比值、以及第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a third distance threshold and a fourth distance threshold, the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of d TA to d FF , and the third distance threshold and the fourth distance threshold.
若距离阈值包括第一距离阈值、第二距离阈值、第三距离阈值和第四距离阈值,则网络设备120可以自行决定使用哪些距离阈值确定目标信道模型。If the distance threshold includes a first distance threshold, a second distance threshold, a third distance threshold, and a fourth distance threshold, the network device 120 may decide by itself which distance thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
S1050,网络设备120向终端设备110指示目标信道模型。S1050 , the network device 120 indicates the target channel model to the terminal device 110 .
例如,网络设备120可以通过第四指示信息向终端设备110指示目标信道模型,其中,第四指示信息可以是一个1比特的字段;第四指示信息为0可以指示目标信道模型是第一信道模型,第四指示信息为1可以指示目标信道模型是第二信道模型。For example, the network device 120 can indicate the target channel model to the terminal device 110 through the fourth indication information, wherein the fourth indication information can be a 1-bit field; the fourth indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the fourth indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
确定目标信道模型的方法二。Method 2 for determining the target channel model.
确定天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹tracur;根据tracur确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Determine the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determine the target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis.
tracur为当前天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹,终端设备110可以计算多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值,将该平均值作为tracur以减少tracur的误差,该时间单元例如是传输时间间隔(transmission time interval,TTI)或者时隙,本申请实施例对时间单元的具体类型不做限定。tra cur is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of the current antenna array. The terminal device 110 can calculate the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units, and use the average value as tra cur to reduce the error of tra cur . The time unit is, for example, a transmission time interval (TTI) or a time slot. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the time unit.
在根据tracur确定目标信道模型之前,终端设备110还可以确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹。网络设备120可以计算traref,通过第二指示信息将traref告知终端设备110。Before determining the target channel model according to tra cur , the terminal device 110 may also determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model. The network device 120 may calculate tra ref and inform the terminal device 110 of tra ref through the second indication information.
可选地,traref为预设值,或者,traref为应用第二信道模型的多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值。本申请实施例对确定traref的方法不做限定。Optionally, tra ref is a preset value, or tra ref is an average value of traces of spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices to which the second channel model is applied. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for determining tra ref .
确定tracur和traref后,终端设备110可以根据tracur与traref的差值的绝对值确定目标信道模型,或 者,终端设备110可以根据tracur与traref的比值确定目标信道模型。After determining tra cur and tra ref , the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref , or Alternatively, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of tra cur to tra ref .
例如,若|tracur-traref|>第一迹阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若|tracur-traref|<第二迹阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一迹阈值大于或等于第二迹阈值,第一迹阈值和第二迹阈值可以从网络设备120获取。For example, if |tra cur -tra ref |>first trace threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if |tra cur -tra ref |<second trace threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold, and the first trace threshold and the second trace threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
又例如,若tracur/traref>第三迹阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur/traref<第四迹阈值,终端设备110确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三迹阈值大于或等于第四迹阈值,第三迹阈值和第四迹阈值可以从网络设备120获取。For another example, if tra cur /tra ref >the third trace threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the first channel model; if tra cur /tra ref <the fourth trace threshold, the terminal device 110 determines that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold, and the third trace threshold and the fourth trace threshold can be obtained from the network device 120.
终端设备110确定目标信道模型后,可以通过第三指示信息将目标信道模型告知网络设备120,以便于网络设备120基于目标信道模型重构更加准确的预编码矩阵。After the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model, it can inform the network device 120 of the target channel model through the third indication information, so that the network device 120 can reconstruct a more accurate precoding matrix based on the target channel model.
可选地,网络设备120可以根据tracur与traref的差值的绝对值或者根据tracur与traref的比值确定目标信道模型,随后,网络设备120通过第四指示信息将目标信道模型告知终端设备110。终端设备110无需通过本地计算确定目标信道模型,从而降低了终端设备110确定目标信道模型的功耗。Optionally, the network device 120 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref or according to the ratio of tra cur to tra ref , and then the network device 120 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model through the fourth indication information. The terminal device 110 does not need to determine the target channel model through local calculation, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device 110 in determining the target channel model.
不同的部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP)可以共享上述目标信道模型的判断和各个指示信息。载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景中,相近的频段也可以共享上述目标信道模型的判断和各个指示信息。Different bandwidth parts (BWP) can share the above-mentioned judgment of the target channel model and various indication information. In the carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, similar frequency bands can also share the above-mentioned judgment of the target channel model and various indication information.
例如,终端设备110确定BWP1的目标信道模型后,可以确定BWP2的目标信道模型为BWP1的目标信道模型;终端设备110通过第三指示信息将BWP1的目标信道模型告知网络设备120后,网络设备120可以根据第三指示信息确定BWP2的目标信道模型为BWP1的目标信道模型。For example, after the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model of BWP1, it can determine that the target channel model of BWP2 is the target channel model of BWP1; after the terminal device 110 informs the network device 120 of the target channel model of BWP1 through the third indication information, the network device 120 can determine that the target channel model of BWP2 is the target channel model of BWP1 according to the third indication information.
又例如,网络设备120确定频段1的目标信道模型后,可以确定频段2的目标信道模型为频段1的目标信道模型;终端设备110通过第四指示信息将频段1的目标信道模型告知终端设备110后,终端设备110可以根据第三指示信息确定频段2的目标信道模型为频段1的目标信道模型。其中,频段1和频段2为两个聚合载波对应的频段,并且,频段1和频段2的频率相近。For another example, after the network device 120 determines the target channel model of frequency band 1, it can determine that the target channel model of frequency band 2 is the target channel model of frequency band 1; after the terminal device 110 informs the terminal device 110 of the target channel model of frequency band 1 through the fourth indication information, the terminal device 110 can determine that the target channel model of frequency band 2 is the target channel model of frequency band 1 according to the third indication information. Among them, frequency band 1 and frequency band 2 are frequency bands corresponding to two aggregated carriers, and the frequencies of frequency band 1 and frequency band 2 are similar.
可选地,终端设备110根据tracur确定目标信道模型的方法的信令交互流程如图11所示。Optionally, the signaling interaction process of the method in which the terminal device 110 determines the target channel model according to the tra cur is shown in FIG. 11 .
S1110,网络设备120向终端设备110发送traref和迹阈值。S1110 , the network device 120 sends tra ref and a trace threshold to the terminal device 110 .
该迹阈值可以是:The trace threshold can be:
第一迹阈值,和,第二迹阈值;和/或,a first trace threshold, and a second trace threshold; and/or
第三迹阈值,和,第四迹阈值。The third trace threshold, and, the fourth trace threshold.
若第一迹阈值与第二迹阈值相等,网络设备120可以只发其中的一个;若第三迹阈值与第四迹阈值相等,网络设备120可以只发其中的一个。traref和迹阈值可以承载于一条消息,也可以承载于多条消息中。本申请实施例对承载traref和迹阈值的具体消息不做限定。If the first trace threshold is equal to the second trace threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them; if the third trace threshold is equal to the fourth trace threshold, the network device 120 may send only one of them. The tra ref and the trace threshold may be carried in one message or in multiple messages. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific message carrying the tra ref and the trace threshold.
网络设备120计算traref后,可以通过第二指示信息将traref告知终端设备110。After calculating tra ref , the network device 120 may inform the terminal device 110 of tra ref through the second indication information.
S1120,终端设备110确定tracur。S1120, the terminal device 110 determines tra cur .
终端设备110可以计算多个时间单元的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值,将该平均值作为tracur以减少tracur的误差,该时间单元例如是TTI或者时隙,本申请实施例对时间单元的具体类型不做限定。The terminal device 110 can calculate the average value of the trace of the spatial correlation matrix of multiple time units, and use the average value as the tra cur to reduce the error of the tra cur . The time unit is, for example, TTI or time slot. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific type of the time unit.
S1130,终端设备110根据tracur、traref和迹阈值确定目标信道模型。S1130: The terminal device 110 determines a target channel model according to tra cur , tra ref and a trace threshold.
若迹阈值包括第一迹阈值和第二迹阈值,终端设备110可以根据tracur与tracur的差值的绝对值、以及第一迹阈值和第二迹阈值确定目标信道模型。If the trace threshold includes a first trace threshold and a second trace threshold, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra cur , and the first trace threshold and the second trace threshold.
若迹阈值包括第三迹阈值和第四迹阈值,终端设备110可以根据tracur与tracur的比值、以及第三迹阈值和第四迹阈值确定目标信道模型。If the trace threshold includes a third trace threshold and a fourth trace threshold, the terminal device 110 may determine the target channel model according to the ratio of tra cur to tra cur and the third trace threshold and the fourth trace threshold.
若迹阈值包括第一迹阈值、第二迹阈值、第三迹阈值和第四迹阈值,则终端设备110可以自行决定使用哪些迹阈值确定目标信道模型。If the trace thresholds include a first trace threshold, a second trace threshold, a third trace threshold, and a fourth trace threshold, the terminal device 110 may decide which trace thresholds to use to determine the target channel model.
S1140,终端设备110向网络设备120指示目标信道模型。S1140 , the terminal device 110 indicates the target channel model to the network device 120 .
例如,终端设备110可以通过第三指示信息向网络设备120指示目标信道模型,其中,第三指示信息可以是一个1比特的字段;第三指示信息为0可以指示目标信道模型是第一信道模型,第三指示信息为1可以指示目标信道模型是第二信道模型。For example, the terminal device 110 can indicate the target channel model to the network device 120 through the third indication information, wherein the third indication information can be a 1-bit field; the third indication information being 0 can indicate that the target channel model is the first channel model, and the third indication information being 1 can indicate that the target channel model is the second channel model.
上文详细介绍了本申请实施例提供的方法示例。可以理解的是,相应的装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所 公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above describes in detail the method examples provided by the embodiments of the present application. It is understandable that in order to implement the above functions, the corresponding device includes a hardware structure and/or software module corresponding to each function. The units and algorithm steps of each example described in the disclosed embodiments can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
图12和图13是本申请实施例提供的两种可能的通信装置的结构示意图,这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端设备110或者网络设备120的功能,因此也具备上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,这些通信装置可以是图1所示的终端设备110,可以是图1所述的网络设备120,还可以是应用于终端设备110或者网络设备120中的模型(如,芯片)。Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams of the structures of two possible communication devices provided in the embodiments of the present application. These communication devices can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device 110 or the network device 120 in the above method embodiments, and therefore also have the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiments of the present application, these communication devices can be the terminal device 110 shown in Figure 1, can be the network device 120 described in Figure 1, and can also be a model (such as a chip) applied to the terminal device 110 or the network device 120.
如图12所示,该通信装置1200包括处理单元1210和收发单元1220。收发单元1220在处理单元1210的控制下执行接收步骤和/或发送步骤,其中,收发单元1220在执行发送步骤时为发送单元,收发单元1220在执行接收步骤时为接收单元。As shown in Fig. 12, the communication device 1200 includes a processing unit 1210 and a transceiver unit 1220. The transceiver unit 1220 performs a receiving step and/or a sending step under the control of the processing unit 1210, wherein the transceiver unit 1220 is a sending unit when performing the sending step, and is a receiving unit when performing the receiving step.
通信装置1200用于实现上述图5、图7、图8、图9、图10或图11所述的方法实施例中终端设备110或者网络设备120的功能。The communication device 1200 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device 110 or the network device 120 in the method embodiments described in Figures 5, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11 above.
当通信装置1200用于实现终端设备110的功能时,处理单元1210用于:确定第一空域基底,第一空域基底属于空域基底集合,空域基底集合包括多个空域基底,多个空域基底中的每一个空域基底由网络设备的天线阵列与第一物体之间的一条多径的角度和距离确定;根据第一空域基底确定组合系数;收发单元1220用于:发送PMI,PMI包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数。When the communication device 1200 is used to implement the function of the terminal device 110, the processing unit 1210 is used to: determine a first spatial basis, the first spatial basis belongs to a spatial basis set, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determine the combination coefficient according to the first spatial basis; the transceiver unit 1220 is used to: send PMI, the PMI includes the identifier of the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
可选地,确定第一空域基底前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的量化比特数Δd;根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a quantization bit number Δd of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a distance gap d gap according to r max , r min and Δd; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
可选地,确定第一空域基底前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中相邻两个距离候选值的差值为dgap,dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离存在关联关系;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
可选地,天线阵列包括第一子阵列和第二子阵列,处理单元1210具体用于:确定第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmax、rmin和δ,其中,第一接收数据为来自第一子阵列的数据,第二接收数据为来自第二子阵列的数据,rmin为终端设备与天线阵列的距离的最大值,rmin为终端设备与天线阵列的距离的最小值,δ为第一子阵列与第二子阵列的间距;通过字典学习处理第一接收数据、第二接收数据、rmin、rmin和δ,得到第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底;其中,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;和/或,第二子阵列的角度基底,和,第二子阵列的距离基底。Optionally, the antenna array includes a first subarray and a second subarray, and the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine first received data, second received data, r max , r min and δ, wherein the first received data is data from the first subarray, the second received data is data from the second subarray, r min is the maximum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, r min is the minimum value of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and δ is the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; process the first received data, the second received data, r min , r min and δ through dictionary learning to obtain the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray; wherein the first spatial domain basis includes: the angle basis of the first subarray, and, the distance basis of the first subarray; and/or, the angle basis of the second subarray, and, the distance basis of the second subarray.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA;根据dTA确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a target channel model based on d TA , the target channel model being a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一距离阈值小于或等于第二距离阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dFF与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dFF与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三距离阈值小于或等于第四距离阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d FF to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定第一信号的TA;根据第一信号的TA确定dTA。 Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a TA of the first signal; and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
可选地,确定第一信号的TA之前,收发单元1220还用于:接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第一信号的TA;处理单元1210具体用于:根据第一指示信息确定第一信号的TA。Optionally, before determining the TA of the first signal, the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the TA of the first signal; and the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the TA of the first signal according to the first indication information.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹tracur;根据tracur确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determine a target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determining the first spatial basis includes: determining the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一迹阈值大于或等于第二迹阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三迹阈值大于或等于第四迹阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than a fourth trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
可选地,确定traref之前,收发单元1220还用于:接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示traref;处理单元1210具体用于:根据第二指示信息确定traref。Optionally, before determining tra ref , the transceiver unit 1220 is further configured to: receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate tra ref ; and the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine tra ref according to the second indication information.
可选地,收发单元1220还用于:发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示目标信道模型。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
可选地,确定第一空域基底之前,收发单元1220还用于:接收第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;处理单元1210还用于:根据第四指示信息确定目标信道模型;处理单元1210具体用于:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis, the transceiver unit 1220 is also used to: receive fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; the processing unit 1210 is also used to: determine the target channel model according to the fourth indication information; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the first spatial basis when the target channel model is the first channel model.
本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,当通信装置1200用于实现终端设备110的功能时,通信装置1200的具体工作过程以及执行步骤所产生的技术效果,可以参考前述对应的方法实施例中的描述,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that when the communication device 1200 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device 110, the specific working process of the communication device 1200 and the technical effects produced by the execution steps can refer to the description in the corresponding method embodiment mentioned above. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
通信装置1200可以是终端设备或者芯片。处理单元1210可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,处理单元1210以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现处理单元1210时,处理单元1210可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储单元中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储单元可以集成在处理单元1210中,也可以位于处理单元1210之外,独立存在。The communication device 1200 may be a terminal device or a chip. The processing unit 1210 may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processing unit 1210 may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processing unit 1210 may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a storage unit. The storage unit may be integrated in the processing unit 1210 or located outside the processing unit 1210 and exists independently.
当通信装置1200用于实现网络设备120的功能时,收发单元1220用于:接收PMI,PMI包括第一空域基底的标识和组合系数;处理单元1210用于:根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,空域基底集合包括多个空域基底,多个空域基底中的每一个空域基底由网络设备的天线阵列与第一物体之间的一条多径的角度和距离确定;根据第一空域基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵。When the communication device 1200 is used to implement the function of the network device 120, the transceiver unit 1220 is used to: receive PMI, the PMI includes an identifier and a combination coefficient of a first spatial basis; the processing unit 1210 is used to: determine the first spatial basis from a spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the spatial basis set includes multiple spatial basis, each of the multiple spatial basis is determined by the angle and distance of a multipath between the antenna array of the network device and the first object; determine the precoding matrix according to the first spatial basis and the combination coefficient.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的量化比特数Δd;根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离候选值集合;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a number of quantization bits Δd of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and Δd; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:根据rmax、rmin和Δd确定距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中任意两个距离候选值的差值为dgap的整数倍。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a distance gap d gap according to r max , r min and Δd; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , and the difference between any two distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is an integer multiple of d gap .
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离的最大值rmax和最小值rmin,以及距离间隔dgap;根据rmax、rmin和dgap确定距离候选值集合,距离候选值集合的最大距离候选值为rmax,距离候选值集合的最小距离候选值为rmin,距离候选值集合中相邻两个距离候选值的差值为dgap,dgap与终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离存在关联关系;确定角度候选值集合;根据距离候选值集合和角度候选值集合确定空域基底集合。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine a maximum value r max and a minimum value r min of the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array, and a distance interval d gap ; determine a distance candidate value set according to r max , r min and d gap , the maximum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r max , the minimum distance candidate value of the distance candidate value set is r min , the difference between two adjacent distance candidate values in the distance candidate value set is d gap , and d gap is associated with the distance between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine an angle candidate value set; and determine a spatial basis set according to the distance candidate value set and the angle candidate value set.
可选地,第一空域基底包括:第一子阵列的角度基底,和,第一子阵列的距离基底;处理单元1210具体用于:根据第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离基底、和第一子阵列与第二子阵列的间距,确定第二子阵列的角度基底和第二子阵列的距离基底;根据第一子阵列的角度基底、第一子阵列的距离 基底、第二子阵列的角度基底、第二子阵列的距离基底和组合系数确定预编码矩阵。Optionally, the first spatial basis includes: an angle basis of the first subarray, and a distance basis of the first subarray; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray, and the spacing between the first subarray and the second subarray; and determine the angle basis of the second subarray and the distance basis of the second subarray according to the angle basis of the first subarray, the distance basis of the first subarray The basis, the angle basis of the second subarray, the distance basis of the second subarray, and the combining coefficients determine a precoding matrix.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定终端设备与天线阵列之间的距离dTA;根据dTA确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the distance d TA between the terminal device and the antenna array; determine the target channel model according to d TA , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值小于第一距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的差值的绝对值大于第二距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,所述第一距离阈值小于或等于所述第二距离阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is less than a first distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between d TA and d FF is greater than a second distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first distance threshold is less than or equal to the second distance threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定dFF,dFF为第二信道模型中天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离;若dTA与dFF的比值小于第三距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若dTA与dFF的比值大于第四距离阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三距离阈值小于或等于第四距离阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine d FF , where d FF is the distance from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object in the second channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is less than a third distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of d TA to d FF is greater than a fourth distance threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third distance threshold is less than or equal to the fourth distance threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于,包括:确定第一信号的TA;根据第一信号的TA确定dTA。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically configured to: determine a TA of the first signal; and determine d TA according to the TA of the first signal.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,处理单元1210还用于:确定天线阵列的空域相关性矩阵的迹tracur;根据tracur确定目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底,包括:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the processing unit 1210 is further used to: determine the trace tra cur of the spatial correlation matrix of the antenna array; determine the target channel model according to tra cur , the target channel model is the first channel model or the second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, including: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值大于第一迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的差值的绝对值小于第二迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第一迹阈值大于或等于第二迹阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is greater than a first trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the absolute value of the difference between tra cur and tra ref is less than a second trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the first trace threshold is greater than or equal to the second trace threshold.
可选地,处理单元1210具体用于:确定traref,traref为第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹;若tracur与traref的比值大于第三迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第一信道模型;若tracur与traref的比值小于第四迹阈值,确定目标信道模型为第二信道模型;其中,第三迹阈值大于或等于第四迹阈值。Optionally, the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: determine tra ref , where tra ref is the trace of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is greater than a third trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the first channel model; if the ratio of tra cur to tra ref is less than a fourth trace threshold, determine that the target channel model is the second channel model; wherein the third trace threshold is greater than or equal to the fourth trace threshold.
可选地,收发单元1220还用于:发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示目标信道模型。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a target channel model.
可选地,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底之前,收发单元1220还用于:接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示目标信道模型,目标信道模型为第一信道模型或第二信道模型,其中,在第一信道模型中,天线阵列的各个振子到第一物体的距离不相等,在第二信道模型中,天线阵列中的各个振子到第一物体的距离相等;处理单元1210还用于:根据第三指示信息确定目标信道模型;处理单元1210具体用于:在目标信道模型为第一信道模型的情况下,根据第一空域基底的标识从空域基底集合中确定第一空域基底。Optionally, before determining the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis, the transceiver unit 1220 is also used to: receive third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate a target channel model, the target channel model is a first channel model or a second channel model, wherein, in the first channel model, the distances from each vibrator of the antenna array to the first object are not equal, and in the second channel model, the distances from each vibrator in the antenna array to the first object are equal; the processing unit 1210 is also used to: determine the target channel model according to the third indication information; the processing unit 1210 is specifically used to: when the target channel model is the first channel model, determine the first spatial basis from the spatial basis set according to the identifier of the first spatial basis.
可选地,接收第三指示信息之前,收发单元1220还用于:发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示TA,TA用于确定目标信道模型。Optionally, before receiving the third indication information, the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate TA, and TA is used to determine a target channel model.
可选地,接收第三指示信息之前,收发单元1220还用于:发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第二信道模型对应的空域相关性矩阵的迹traref,traref为应用第二信道模型的多个终端设备的空域相关性矩阵的迹的平均值,traref用于确定目标信道模型。Optionally, before receiving the third indication information, the transceiver unit 1220 is further used to: send second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate the trace tra ref of the spatial correlation matrix corresponding to the second channel model, tra ref is the average value of the traces of the spatial correlation matrices of multiple terminal devices applying the second channel model, and tra ref is used to determine the target channel model.
本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,当通信装置1200用于实现网络设备120的功能时,通信装置1200的具体工作过程以及执行步骤所产生的技术效果,可以参考前述对应的方法实施例中的描述,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that when the communication device 1200 is used to implement the functions of the network device 120, the specific working process of the communication device 1200 and the technical effects produced by the execution steps can refer to the description in the corresponding method embodiment mentioned above. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
通信装置1200可以是网络设备或者芯片。处理单元1210可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,处理单元1210以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现处理单元1210时,处理单元1210可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储单元中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储单元可以集成在处理单元1210中,也可以位于处理单元1210之外,独立存在。 The communication device 1200 may be a network device or a chip. The processing unit 1210 may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processing unit 1210 may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processing unit 1210 may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a storage unit. The storage unit may be integrated in the processing unit 1210 or located outside the processing unit 1210 and exists independently.
如图13所示,通信装置1300包括处理器1310和接口电路1320。处理器1310和接口电路1320之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,接口电路1320可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选的,通信装置1300还可以包括存储器1330,用于存储处理器1310执行的指令或存储处理器1310运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1310运行指令后产生的数据。As shown in FIG13 , the communication device 1300 includes a processor 1310 and an interface circuit 1320. The processor 1310 and the interface circuit 1320 are coupled to each other. It is understood that the interface circuit 1320 may be a transceiver or an input/output interface. Optionally, the communication device 1300 may further include a memory 1330 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1310 or storing input data required by the processor 1310 to execute instructions or storing data generated after the processor 1310 executes instructions.
当通信装置1300用于实现图5所示的方法时,处理器1310用于实现上述处理单元1210的功能,接口电路1320用于实现上述收发单元1220的功能。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the method shown in FIG. 5 , the processor 1310 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1210 , and the interface circuit 1320 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1220 .
当通信装置1300为终端芯片(即,应用于终端设备的芯片)时,该终端芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备110的功能。该终端芯片接收来自基站的信息,可以理解为该信息是先由终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收到的,然后再由这些模块发送给终端芯片。该终端芯片向基站发送信息,可以理解为该信息是先发送给终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线),然后再由这些模块向基站发送。When the communication device 1300 is a terminal chip (i.e., a chip applied to a terminal device), the terminal chip implements the functions of the terminal device 110 in the above method embodiment. The terminal chip receives information from the base station, which can be understood as the information is first received by other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the terminal chip by these modules. The terminal chip sends information to the base station, which can be understood as the information is first sent to other modules in the terminal (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the base station by these modules.
当通信装置1300为基站芯片(即,应用于基站的芯片)时,该基站芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络设备120的功能。该基站芯片接收来自终端的信息,可以理解为该信息是先由基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收到的,然后再由这些模块发送给基站芯片。该基站芯片向终端发送信息,可以理解为该信息是下发送给基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线),然后再由这些模块向终端发送。When the communication device 1300 is a base station chip (i.e., a chip applied to a base station), the base station chip implements the functions of the network device 120 in the above method embodiment. The base station chip receives information from the terminal, which can be understood as the information is first received by other modules in the base station (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the base station chip by these modules. The base station chip sends information to the terminal, which can be understood as the information is sent to other modules in the base station (such as a radio frequency module or an antenna), and then sent to the terminal by these modules.
在本申请中,实体A向实体B发送信息,可以是A直接向B发送,也可以是A经过其它实体间接地向B发送。同样的,实体B接收来自实体A的信息,可以是实体B直接接收实体A发送的信息,也可以是实体B通过其它实体间接地接收实体A发送的信息。这里的实体A和B可以是RAN节点或终端,也可以是RAN节点或终端内部的模块。信息的发送与接收可以是RAN节点与终端之间的信息交互,例如,基站与终端之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收也可以是两个RAN节点之间的信息交互,例如CU和DU之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收还可以是在一个装置内部不同模块之间的信息交互,例如,终端芯片与终端其它模块之间的信息交互,或者,基站芯片与该基站中其它模块之间的信息交互。In the present application, when entity A sends information to entity B, it can be that A sends it directly to B, or that A sends it to B indirectly through other entities. Similarly, when entity B receives information from entity A, it can be that entity B directly receives the information sent by entity A, or that entity B indirectly receives the information sent by entity A through other entities. Entities A and B here can be RAN nodes or terminals, or modules inside the RAN nodes or terminals. The sending and receiving of information can be information interaction between a RAN node and a terminal, for example, information interaction between a base station and a terminal; the sending and receiving of information can also be information interaction between two RAN nodes, for example, information interaction between a CU and a DU; the sending and receiving of information can also be information interaction between different modules inside a device, for example, information interaction between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or information interaction between a base station chip and other modules in the base station.
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。为了便于说明,图14仅示出了终端设备1400的主要部件。终端设备1400可应用于图1所示的系统中,实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图设备所示,终端设备1400包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。控制电路主要用于数字信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置例如是触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等,主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application. For ease of explanation, FIG14 only shows the main components of the terminal device 1400. The terminal device 1400 can be applied to the system shown in FIG1 to implement the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment. As shown in the device, the terminal device 1400 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input-output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to perform the actions described in the above method embodiment. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of digital signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. The input-output device is, for example, a touch screen, a display screen, a keyboard, etc., which is mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储器中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行处理后,输出数字信号至射频电路,射频电路将数字信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为数字信号,并将数字信号输出至处理器,处理器将数字信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the memory, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor processes the data to be sent and outputs a digital signal to the RF circuit. The RF circuit processes the digital signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a digital signal, and outputs the digital signal to the processor. The processor converts the digital signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图14仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请对此不做限定。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, for ease of explanation, FIG. 14 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in this application.
作为一种可选的实现方式,处理器可以包括基带处理器和/或中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图14中的处理器可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。As an optional implementation, the processor may include a baseband processor and/or a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The processor in Figure 14 may integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art may understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art may understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, the terminal device may include multiple central processing units to enhance its processing capabilities, and the various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit may also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built into the processor, or may be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备1400的收发单元1401,例 如,用于支持终端设备实现方法实施例所述的接收功能和发送功能。将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备1400的处理器1402。终端设备1400包括收发单元1401和处理器1402。收发单元1401也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。示例性地,可以将收发单元1401中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1401中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1401包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。示例性地,收发单元1401可以不包括天线,而仅包括电路部分,使得天线外置于所述收发单元。In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the control circuit having the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit 1401 of the terminal device 1400. For example, it is used to support the receiving function and sending function described in the embodiment of the method for implementing the terminal device. The processor with processing function is regarded as the processor 1402 of the terminal device 1400. The terminal device 1400 includes a transceiver unit 1401 and a processor 1402. The transceiver unit 1401 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc. Exemplarily, the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1401 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit 1401 may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1401 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc. Exemplarily, the transceiver unit 1401 may not include an antenna, but only include a circuit part, so that the antenna is external to the transceiver unit.
处理器1402可用于执行该存储器存储的指令,以控制收发单元1401接收信号和/或发送信号,完成上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。作为一种实现方式,收发单元1401的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。在执行各类信号的收发时,处理器1402控制收发单元1401实现所述接收。因此处理器1402是信号收发决定者,并发起数据收发操作,收发单元1401是信号收发的执行者。The processor 1402 can be used to execute the instructions stored in the memory to control the transceiver unit 1401 to receive signals and/or send signals, and complete the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment. As an implementation method, the function of the transceiver unit 1401 can be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. When executing the transceiver of various types of signals, the processor 1402 controls the transceiver unit 1401 to implement the reception. Therefore, the processor 1402 is the signal transceiver decider and initiates the data transceiver operation, and the transceiver unit 1401 is the executor of the signal transceiver.
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。为了便于说明,图15仅示出了网络设备1500的主要部件。网络设备1500可应用于图1所示的系统中,实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图15所示,网络设备1500可包括一个或多个DU1510,以及一个或多个CU1520。DU1510可以包括至少一个天线1511,至少一个射频单元1512,至少一个处理器1513和至少一个存储器1514。CU1520可以与核心网通信,CU1520可以包括至少一个处理器1522和至少一个存储器1521。Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application. For ease of explanation, Figure 15 only shows the main components of the network device 1500. The network device 1500 can be applied to the system shown in Figure 1 to implement the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment. As shown in Figure 15, the network device 1500 may include one or more DU1510, and one or more CU1520. DU1510 may include at least one antenna 1511, at least one radio frequency unit 1512, at least one processor 1513 and at least one memory 1514. CU1520 can communicate with the core network, and CU1520 may include at least one processor 1522 and at least one memory 1521.
DU1510主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,以及完成部分基带处理功能。CU1520可以包括至少一个处理器1522和至少一个存储器1521。CU1520和DU1510之间可以通过接口进行通信,其中,控制面(control plane,CP))接口可以为Fs-C,比如F1-C,用户面(user plane,UP)接口可以为Fs-U,比如F1-U。DU1510 is mainly used for receiving and transmitting RF signals and converting RF signals to baseband signals, and completing some baseband processing functions. CU1520 may include at least one processor 1522 and at least one memory 1521. CU1520 and DU1510 may communicate through interfaces, wherein the control plane (CP) interface may be Fs-C, such as F1-C, and the user plane (UP) interface may be Fs-U, such as F1-U.
CU1520为网络设备1500的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如CU1520可以用于控制网络设备1500执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。DU1510与CU1520可以是物理上设置在一起的,也可以是物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。CU1520 is the control center of the network device 1500, which can also be called a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc. For example, CU1520 can be used to control the network device 1500 to execute the operation process of the network device in the above method embodiment. DU1510 and CU1520 can be physically set together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
DU1510与CU1520上的基带处理功能可以根据无线网络的协议层进行划分,例如,PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU1520,PDCP以下的协议层的功能设置在DU1510。The baseband processing functions on DU1510 and CU1520 can be divided according to the protocol layers of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in CU1520, and the functions of the protocol layers below PDCP are set in DU1510.
在一个可选的实施例中,DU1510可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如新无线(new radio,NR)网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如长期演进(long time evolution,LTE)网和NR网)。存储器1514用于存储必要的指令和数据,处理器1513用于控制网络设备1500进行必要的动作。存储器1514和处理器1513可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以在每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以为多个单板设置共用的存储器和处理器。此外,每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an optional embodiment, DU1510 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as a new radio (NR) network), or may respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as a long-term evolution (LTE) network and a NR network). The memory 1514 is used to store necessary instructions and data, and the processor 1513 is used to control the network device 1500 to perform necessary actions. The memory 1514 and the processor 1513 may serve one or more boards. In other words, a memory and a processor may be separately set on each board. A shared memory and a processor may also be set for multiple boards. In addition, necessary circuits may also be set on each board.
在一个可选的实施例中,CU1520可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如NR网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网和NR网)。存储器1521用于存储必要的指令和数据,处理器1522用于控制网络设备1500进行必要的动作,例如用于控制网络设备1500执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。存储器1521和处理器1522可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以在每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以为多个单板设置共用的存储器和处理器。此外,每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an optional embodiment, CU1520 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as an NR network), or may respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as an LTE network and an NR network). The memory 1521 is used to store necessary instructions and data, and the processor 1522 is used to control the network device 1500 to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device 1500 to execute the operation flow of the network device in the above method embodiment. The memory 1521 and the processor 1522 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, a memory and a processor may be separately set on each single board. A shared memory and a processor may also be set for multiple single boards. In addition, necessary circuits may also be set on each single board.
应理解,图15所示的网络设备1500能够实现方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。网络设备1500中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the network device 1500 shown in FIG15 can implement various processes related to the network device in the method embodiment. The operations and/or functions of each module in the network device 1500 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiment. For details, please refer to the description in the above method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图15所示出的网络设备1500仅为网络设备的一种可能的架构,不对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他架构的网络设备。例如,包含CU、DU和AAU的网络设备,或者,包含BBU和RRU的网络设备。本申请对于网络设备的具体架构不作限定。It should be understood that the network device 1500 shown in FIG. 15 is only a possible architecture of the network device and does not constitute any limitation to the present application. The method provided in the present application may be applicable to network devices of other architectures. For example, a network device including a CU, a DU, and an AAU, or a network device including a BBU and an RRU. The present application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。 It is understandable that the processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以在硬件中实现,也可以在可由处理器执行的软件指令中实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于基站或终端中。处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于基站或终端中。The method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or in software instructions that can be executed by a processor. The software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium. The storage medium can also be a component of the processor. The processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC. In addition, the ASIC can be located in a base station or a terminal. The processor and the storage medium can also be present in a base station or a terminal as discrete components.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user device or other programmable device. The computer program or instruction may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instruction may be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that integrates one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium, for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape; it may also be an optical medium, for example, a digital video disc; it may also be a semiconductor medium, for example, a solid-state hard disk. The computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or nonvolatile storage medium, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified or provided for in any logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between the different embodiments are consistent and may be referenced to each other, and the technical features in the different embodiments may be combined to form new embodiments according to their inherent logical relationships.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。“包括A,B和C中的至少一个”可以表示:包括A;包括B;包括C;包括A和B;包括A和C;包括B和C;包括A、B和C。In the present application, "at least one" means one or more, and "more than one" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. In the text description of the present application, the character "/" generally indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in an "or" relationship; in the formula of the present application, the character "/" indicates that the previous and next associated objects are in a "division" relationship. "Including at least one of A, B and C" can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B and C.
可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。It is understood that the various numbers involved in the embodiments of the present application are only for the convenience of description and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic.
还应理解,在本申请中,“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下UE或者基站会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求UE或基站实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。 It should also be understood that in the present application, "when", "if" and "if" all mean that the UE or base station will take corresponding actions under certain objective circumstances. It is not a time limit, and it does not require the UE or base station to make judgments when implementing it, nor does it mean that there are other limitations.
Claims (26)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202311290544.1 | 2023-09-28 | ||
| CN202311290544.1A CN119727810A (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2023-09-28 | Communication method and communication device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025066920A1 true WO2025066920A1 (en) | 2025-04-03 |
Family
ID=95093818
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/118539 Pending WO2025066920A1 (en) | 2023-09-28 | 2024-09-12 | Communication method and communication apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN119727810A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025066920A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN110830092A (en) * | 2018-08-10 | 2020-02-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for indicating precoding matrix and determining precoding matrix and communication device |
| US20220231741A1 (en) * | 2019-05-27 | 2022-07-21 | Zte Corporation | Information feedback method and apparatus, information receiving method and apparatus, information acquisition method and apparatus, communication node and storage medium |
| CN115250139A (en) * | 2021-04-28 | 2022-10-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and related equipment |
-
2023
- 2023-09-28 CN CN202311290544.1A patent/CN119727810A/en active Pending
-
2024
- 2024-09-12 WO PCT/CN2024/118539 patent/WO2025066920A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN110830092A (en) * | 2018-08-10 | 2020-02-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for indicating precoding matrix and determining precoding matrix and communication device |
| US20220231741A1 (en) * | 2019-05-27 | 2022-07-21 | Zte Corporation | Information feedback method and apparatus, information receiving method and apparatus, information acquisition method and apparatus, communication node and storage medium |
| CN115250139A (en) * | 2021-04-28 | 2022-10-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and related equipment |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| ZTE: "CSI enhancement for high/medium UE velocities and CJT", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2203265, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20220509 - 20220520, 29 April 2022 (2022-04-29), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052152901 * |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN119727810A (en) | 2025-03-28 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| EP4207491A1 (en) | Electronic device, wireless communication method and computer-readable storage medium | |
| US12267132B2 (en) | Channel state information reporting method and communications apparatus | |
| US20250247138A1 (en) | Channel state information feedback method and communications apparatus | |
| EP4274112A1 (en) | Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus | |
| US11496188B2 (en) | Electronic device, communication method and medium | |
| EP4535682A1 (en) | Channel state information reporting method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024028701A1 (en) | Operation of a two-sided model | |
| WO2021081847A1 (en) | Channel measurement method and communication apparatus | |
| US12476674B2 (en) | Channel measurement method and precoding method and apparatus | |
| CN116235415B (en) | Signal transmission method and related device | |
| US20240348300A1 (en) | Data processing method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025066920A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2024069370A1 (en) | Channel state information reporting | |
| CN117498902A (en) | Information transmission method and device | |
| EP4117194A1 (en) | Updating method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025139762A1 (en) | Channel state information reporting method and related product | |
| WO2025060883A1 (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2025140520A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| CN120238884A (en) | Communication method and communication device | |
| WO2025223118A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025113124A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025113117A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025195293A1 (en) | Channel state information feedback method and related product | |
| WO2025066883A1 (en) | Base feedback method and apparatus | |
| WO2025066754A1 (en) | Channel state information feedback method and related product |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24870464 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |